The phase of acclimatizing

 Here you can find my blog about the acclimatization phase of my Everest/Lhotse ascent. If you missed the entries about the trek to Base Camp, you can catch up on them with a click. 

Sunday, 13th of April - EBC

Yesterday afternoon, I didn’t do much. I read a little, enjoyed the sun, and waited for my duffle bag. Additionally, I managed to convince Chirring and Gyalzen to take a short walk to Crampon Point in the Khumbu Icefall. This is the place where only people with a permit for Everest or Lhotse are allowed to go further. On the way to the glacier, a group of yaks blocked our path, and as luck would have it, my duffle bag was secured on one of the yaks. We waited until the yak driver had untied the bag and the yak had calmed down a bit. After that, Chirring brought the duffle to my tent. Meanwhile, Gyalzen and I waited at the edge of the glacier for him and thought about the best way to cross the small meltwater stream. Unfortunately, I stepped on a wobbly stone, so I had to continue with a wet shoe. But since the sun was shining, it wasn’t that bad. It was nice to finally be at the glacier, even if it was just a short walk. The route had been marked in the morning by the Icefall Doctors with flags so that everyone knows where to go. From Crampon Point, we could spot 2-3 more flags, but beyond that, we could only guess the way. After a short look at the glacier, we turned back. I swapped my wet shoes for down booties and headed to the dining tent. Suddenly, I heard a female voice from the next camp, excited about a pee tent. I turned around and could hardly believe my eyes when I saw another Westerner. It turned out that the cheerful lady’s name was Gaby, she’s from the Netherlands, and she had been at the EBC for two weeks already. My entire crew and hers had failed to inform each other that there was a lonely lady in the other camp who would appreciate some company. She was pretty angry about that, as she had been asking for two weeks when someone else would arrive. I had also been repeatedly reassured when I asked when other climbers or trekkers would arrive. We immediately sat down together in my dining tent, where we chatted for hours. She has been here since last October to work on her PhD. She’s researching gender roles in expeditions and camps, if I understood correctly. She was at Ama Dablam last fall for her research and summited it at the same time. Then she went on to the Annapurna Winter Expedition Base Camp and has been here since early April continuing her research. She is integrated with SST and has her tent there. At the beginning, there were no dining tents or anything like that, so she had to eat in the Sherpa kitchen for the first week, or was allowed to. So, she now knows all the Sherpas, and they know her, so everyone should have realized they needed to inform Gaby when I arrived yesterday. 

At least we had some company, and she even stayed with me for dinner. We’re trying to meet up and exchange ideas during the next few weeks. She will get a permit that will allow her to go up to Camp 2, so she can make her observations on the mountain. I’m definitely looking forward to many more fun conversations. At 9 PM, however, she had to head “home” so it wouldn’t get too cold for the short but steep walk back. There aren’t many paths between the camps yet, and we’re practically sitting on bare ice, which is only covered with rubble. 

Tuesday, 15th April - EBC - Lobuche Highcamp - EBC

On Monday morning, breakfast was again at 8:30 AM, and then it was time to pack. Today, Chirring, Gyalzen, and I were heading to the Lobuche Highcamp. It was planned for yesterday, but the rest day had somehow been quite beneficial. We needed our warm down jackets, climbing gear, and for the overnight at the summit, a tent and sleeping mats. All of this had to be packed together so that a porter could accompany us along the way. My part was simple; I just had to lay everything out that Chirring and Gyalzen told me to, and then we checked everything again together to ensure nothing was missing. My backpack would be filled with just rain gear, gloves, a down jacket, snacks, and 2 liters of water. After about an hour, we were ready to go, and we marched towards Lobuche.

After 1.5 hours, we reached Gorak Shep. On the way, we met two South African women with whom Gyalzen took a photo, and I chatted with them a little. They were somewhat impressed when we told them we were on our way to summit a 6000-meter peak. I almost didn’t dare to say that this was actually just an acclimatization for Everest and Lhotse. They were even more impressed and bombarded me with questions. I tried to answer them as best as I could without getting too out of breath or slowing down. In Gorak Shep, we had to say goodbye because they were taking a break there. We continued on our way until, about an hour later, we arrived in Lobuche. We had lunch at one of the tea houses there. I had fries, and the guys had chow mein. I also took the opportunity to use a normal toilet before we set off for the second, steeper part of the hike.

At first, the climb was moderately steep as we entered the valley of Lobuche East, and then it became steeper. By now, the weather had turned, and it became noticeably cold and windy. Not long after, it started to snow lightly, and the higher we got, the more snow came toward us. The rocks disappeared under the snow, and it became increasingly difficult to see the path. Chirring, however, led us confidently forward—he probably knew the route by heart. The steep sections were secured with ropes that we could either pull ourselves up or hold on to. Fortunately, the rocks weren’t as slippery as they looked, but Chirring and Gyalzen were wearing sneakers, so we had to be very careful. After about 1.5 hours of climbing, we arrived at a high plateau with some tents. But as I realized later, this was only part of the high camp. Our camp was 100 meters lower, and the way there was anything but pleasant: very steep, snow-covered, and unsecured, we crept along a rock wall toward the camp. My hands, despite gloves, were frozen by now, and I tried to warm them up while also making sure not to trip or slip. I think we were all relieved when we finally arrived at camp.

There, I first drank a black tea in the small dining tent to get my hands working again, and soon after, Eloise appeared at the entrance of the tent. She had arrived the day before with Bryce, Phunuru, and Allan, and today was supposed to be a training day. However, due to the bad conditions on Lobuche East, they had spent most of the day just sitting around in their tents. When we arrived, they were discussing their gear. It was nice to sit in a tent after the snowstorm, even though it was clear that, unless the conditions improved rapidly, there would be no summit attempt for us.

They also told us newcomers some interesting news. One was that a Chinese woman had left for the summit during the night with a guide and had already been on her way for 13 hours. Another Australian had been on the mountain for 6 hours but was with a very experienced Sherpa guide. Phunuru and Allan were quite worried about the Chinese woman because she had arrived at the high camp without any proper gear. She also seemed to have no knowledge of mountaineering, climbing, or dealing with the cold. In any case, her idea of attempting Lobuche East seemed downright foolish even under good conditions. By now, Phunuru had managed to get a weather report from Kathmandu over the radio, which promised that the weather would clear up by 5 PM and that it would start snowing again at 9:30 AM the next morning. For all of us, it was clear that we wouldn't attempt to summit because it was simply too dangerous.

The mountain had no snow until two days ago, just a thin layer of ice on the rocks. This layer is too thin to use crampons for grip but is still extremely slippery. None of us wanted to take any risks on Lobuche East. I informed Chirring and Gyalzen that we wouldn’t be going up, and the plan was to spend the night in the high camp and then descend together. The weather report turned out to be fairly accurate, and gradually beautiful views emerged behind the clouds. We could even see the entire Lobuche East at times, along with views down both ropes. Standing at 5300 meters amidst a breathtaking mountain panorama, it was enough of a reward for the day's hike, even though no acclimatization would come of it. Allan said I had at least had a good workout.

It was also nice to spend one more evening with the four of them, chatting and laughing together, and making fun of the Chinese woman. She had now appeared and arrived at the camp. Her equipment was more than questionable, and she had been on the mountain for 18 hours. Proudly, she showed us her summit photo, which didn’t actually show a summit. The Sherpa had apparently had enough at some point and simply told her she was at the summit. Only half an hour later, the Australian returned. He had been on the mountain for 8 hours and had a real summit photo to show. Unfortunately, he also had some horror stories, which I’d rather not go into detail about. Let’s just say: the Chinese woman had behaved so poorly on the mountain that the Australian had to intervene in a dispute between her and her Sherpa, during which the Sherpa had even cried.

We were just glad that no rescue operation was needed and that all four of them had safely returned to camp. In camp, there were also 8 Russians who had chosen Lobuche East as their peak. Four of them were acclimatizing for a Makalu ascent, and the other four were there to climb their first peak in Nepal. These 8 didn’t let the experience of others or the poor conditions stop them from attempting the summit. They left the high camp at midnight, but turned around somewhere between 5800 and 5300 meters. They didn’t fully trust the locals and wanted to assess the conditions with their own eyes. It seemed that they all safely made it back to the high camp. I was sharing my tent in camp with Eloise, once again a perfect tent mate. Surprisingly, the night wasn’t too cold, so we both managed to sleep well.

On Tuesday morning, we had breakfast in the sun outside. I only had a piece of toast since the eggs were too cold. Afterward, we packed our things together. The goal was to get through the most difficult part of the descent before the bad weather front was supposed to hit. We set off around 9 AM. Fortunately, the path down was different from the one we had taken the day before. It was also steep and snow-covered but didn’t involve slanted rocks or cliffs. We went slowly but carefully, and the further down we got, the thinner the snow cover became. It only took about 45 minutes until we were out of the snow and the danger had passed. A short time later, our paths diverged for the last time. Allan, Phunuru, Bryce, and Eloise would continue toward Pheriche and/or Pangboche. Gyalzen would accompany them and spend a few days at home in Phortse. Chirring and I turned left toward Lobuche to return to the EBC. I hope to see the four of them again someday. Eloise has, at least, received an invitation to the Basler Fasnacht from me, and I hope she’ll actually come. (Eloise, if you’re reading this, I’m counting on you 😉)

In Lobuche, we took some time for a small lunch again. This time, I had toast with fried eggs since the fries had been a little dry yesterday. Afterward, we hiked back the same way we had come to the EBC, overtaking groups, being overtaken by yaks, and crossing paths with them, going up and down, always moving toward the EBC. When we reached the famous stone, we simply continued forward to cover the last half hour. When we finally arrived at the foot of our camp, I realized all the work the camp Sherpas had done in the past two days. There were paths and stairs everywhere, and Puja shrines had been set up, along with lights and decorations. I was looking forward to a hot cup of tea in our dining tent, and when we turned the corner, I was a little surprised to see people in the tent. I hadn’t known that new climbers were supposed to arrive, and when I tried to enter the dining tent, it was impossible. It was full of a group of South Americans who had all placed their backpacks in the entrance area. There was almost no way through. Still, I managed to get inside and grab the last fresh cup of tea. I poured myself some tea and quickly fled back outside. Since it had been snowing again for the past two hours and was pretty cold, Chirring took me to the kitchen tent, where I could drink my tea in peace and even got two refills. I was a little puzzled that the dining tent, after being so empty before, was now so full, and I had to adjust to that. After my third cup of tea, I went back up to the dining tent, where things had calmed down a bit. The group was sitting at a table, and when I asked where they were from, they told me that they would only stay for one night and would trek back the next day. Only two of the group were Everest climbers, and they would go with the group to Lobuche the next day to then ascend to the Highcamp on Wednesday.

I retreated to my tent to repack everything and change clothes so I wouldn’t have to change clothes again in the cold after dinner. Afterward, I spent time in the dining tent chatting, reading, and trying to get the Wi-Fi to work. After dinner, I quickly went back to my tent to rest and escape the noise from the South Americans. Before I did, I had to eat a small piece of cake that they had received to celebrate reaching the EBC. As always, the cake was very airy but topped with way too much frosting.

Wednesday, 16th of April - EBC - Shower

Today was finally, finally the day for the shower. Still in my sleeping bag early this morning, I hoped for a sunny day so I could wash my hair and dry it quickly. Since I barely heard any helicopters, I had to wait until I left the tent to see what the weather outside would be like. I got lucky—it was a bit windy, but sunny with a cloudless sky.

First, though, breakfast was planned. As usual, it was brought at 9 a.m., right on time. I stuck with scrambled eggs and toast, along with a small bowl of fruit. That’s something I can really eat right now, and I hope it stays that way. Afterward, the kitchen Sherpas got the shower ready and tried to explain to me how it works. It has a small motor with a button that you need to press to turn it on and off. Then you place the motor into a pan full of water, and the shower head starts running.

Since there was only a stool in the shower for clothes and the shower was luckily only about 10 meters from the dining tent, I laid everything out in the dining tent and hopped into the shower tent in my shirt and sandals. Since the air wasn’t too cold, I really enjoyed the shower and washed my hair thoroughly. It felt good to wash off the dust, sunscreen, and the little sweat from the last 15 days. I ended up using both pans of water so that I really felt clean by the end.

Back in the quiet dining tent, I really enjoyed putting on fresh clothes and hanging up the wet towels. Since the tent has two windows that let the sun shine directly in, drying my hair wasn’t a problem either. Before breakfast, I had already asked if someone could help me with the Wi-Fi issues, so I expected that someone would come by while I was drying my hair to help solve the problem. Unfortunately, that didn’t happen, and the longer I waited, the more the loneliness started to hit me. It had been five days since I’d heard from my family or friends, and I couldn’t share anything either.

Since everyone knew the schedule, they assumed I was off climbing Lobuche East as planned, which wasn’t true, and I couldn’t tell anyone. I also didn’t know if the bad conditions had been reported somewhere online and simply hoped no one thought to Google Lobuche East and get a shock.

Because of that, I couldn’t really enjoy lunch, so I spent 5 hours straight in the dining tent, charging all my devices. You never know when the next group will come in and take over everything. Mentally, today was definitely the hardest day, since even Chirring couldn’t help, and a call with Phunuru only happened after a few hours. Phunuru tried to figure out why the Wi-Fi had stopped working on the way back to Namche, after it had been fine until Saturday afternoon.

I had no choice but to wait, ignore my running nose, and keep myself busy. At some point, a lone climber named Valery showed up in the dining tent. We exchanged a few words, and he fully enjoyed his phone reception. I fiddled around a bit with the iPad, since I couldn’t borrow any new books without Wi-Fi and had already read all the ones I had. Then a group of Indians came in, said hello briefly, and left again. Shortly afterward, another lone Indian appeared, and he stayed for a while. It seemed like they had just arrived in EBC with Tashi after a 10-day trek and were now just waiting to fly back to Kathmandu by helicopter. He told me about the great hotel waiting for him, which didn’t really help my mental state.

Luckily, after about an hour, he was off in the helicopter to his longed-for hot shower and soft bed. I was still waiting for someone who would take my Wi-Fi issue seriously and help me. Everyone I asked either couldn’t or wouldn’t help. Valery sympathized with me but couldn’t offer much assistance either. The only positive news was that he knew Julia, a Russian woman who lives in Zermatt and whom I met on Manaslu, had arrived in EBC yesterday and was planning to visit him in the dining tent.

At some point, I got fed up with waiting and went to my tent to dress warmly, because with the clouds, the temperature would drop in the afternoon. Dressed warmly, I decided to look for the Wi-Fi guy named Ganesh, hoping I might run into Gaby or Julia along the way. In front of the coffee tent, I met three Russians from Seven Summit Treks, who told me they had seen Gaby somewhere near the dining tents. So, I went to one of them, opened it, and was totally shocked when I found it full of people. And there, I recognized one of them—it was Bianca, who had become the youngest woman to summit Manaslu just half a year ago. We had a long conversation in Samagaun during the monsoon period, so it was especially nice to see her on a day like today. She had been trekking the last few days with her father and friends, and they all welcomed me warmly.

Of course, I didn’t decline the invitation for tea. By now, I had felt nothing but loneliness all day, and now I learned that just 100 meters away, a fun group of Aussies had been hanging out all day—next to the group of Russians in the same tent. Not long after I settled into their tent, I saw Ganesh outside and immediately rushed over to him so he could finally sort out my Wi-Fi problem. However, he dug in his heels and refused to help, even saying that my login details wouldn’t work anyway. While I tried to argue with him, Chirring suddenly appeared with a message from Phunuru containing new login details. Funny enough, or should I say luckily, these worked perfectly, and just like that, my problem was solved in an instant, after I’d spent the whole day feeling useless and unimportant.

Even Valery had mentioned at some point that we probably weren’t leaving enough money here to be seen as important by anyone. He had similar worries—his climbing duffle had been on its way for 8 days and still hadn’t arrived in EBC. No one was able or willing to help him, no matter who he asked.

Back to the Aussies. Now I had Wi-Fi, but also some company, so I left my phone in my jacket pocket and fully enjoyed the time with them. Gaby suddenly showed up, and after what felt like 5 minutes, Valery entered the tent to tell me that Julia was outside. So, Bianca and I quickly went outside, where we chatted with Julia and Gaby for a bit. Valery said he would rather eat in the dining tent with the Russians, and I decided to let our kitchen crew know that we would be eating with SST tonight.

Although I had already spent 4 nights in EBC, I was still pretty out of breath when I sprinted 100 meters to the kitchen tent. It didn’t seem to be a problem that we were eating out for once, and they promised to have hot water ready for our bed bottles. So, I went back and had a wonderful dinner with the Aussies. It seems like they have a special role on this expedition, because without "my" Aussies, the trek or Lobuche High Camp would have been pretty lonely. I’m especially thankful for them today.

At 9 p.m., it was time to say goodbye. Except for Bianca and her father Paul, everyone else would be making the long journey to Lukla tomorrow, so there were lots of hugs and well-wishes. I rushed as quickly as I could in the cold to my dining tent to fill up my water bottles. From there, I went straight to my tent, put the water bottles in my sleeping bag, grabbed my toothbrush, and went outside to brush my teeth while watching the headlamps in the Icefall. I also had one last pee.

When I finally lay back in my warm sleeping bag and tested the Wi-Fi, I was incredibly relieved that it was still working, and I could finally respond to everyone in peace. So, it got pretty late before I could fall asleep, but I was definitely a lot less depressed than I had been a few hours earlier.

Thursday, 17th of April - EBC - Pumori Highcamp - EBC

This morning was another acclimatization day, since I haven’t spent enough time at altitude yet due to Lobuche East being unclimbable. The plan was to have breakfast at 8 a.m. Unfortunately, I wasn’t able to tell the kitchen crew about it last night, so they only started preparing when I showed up at the dining tent at ten to eight. I wasn’t feeling 100% either, as I’ve come down with a bad cold. I assume it’s from the very first day at EBC, when it was simply too cold for me.

While waiting for the food, I had a few cups of tea and thought about whether it even made sense to go on another few hours’ hike today. The sun was shining, and I could have done a bit of laundry instead. But after nearly finishing breakfast, I felt okay enough to at least head out. Since I was out with Chirring alone, I could turn back anytime.

The first 10–20 minutes I didn’t feel great, but after we passed the EBC stone and climbed the first steep meters up to the moraine ridge, I felt quite good. We continued upwards, serpentine after serpentine, over scree and large rocks. The goal was Pumori High Camp, which lies at around 5,700 meters. We took 2–3 short water breaks and two longer pauses, during which we discussed the routes on Lhotse and Everest. The higher we got, the more of the route we could see.

There were quite a few people on Pumori today—I assume that’s due to the conditions on Lobuche East. We passed a few along the way, even though we were going at a pretty slow pace. Once we arrived at the High Camp, we went a bit further up so we wouldn’t have to sit among the crowd. We spent about an hour up there, mostly just admiring Everest, the Icefall, and Lhotse. At one point, I built a tiny snowman, and Chirring posed with a few flags from friends.

After about 45 minutes, the sun disappeared behind a massive wall of clouds and it instantly got colder. Still, we stayed a little longer, watching others make their way back to EBC. We took the same path down as we had up. It was rocky and uneven, and on the scree slopes, you had to be careful not to slip. But it wasn’t a problem for us, and we soon passed the first few groups again.

An hour later, we stood for the third time this week in front of the famous EBC stone, watching trekkers hugging each other in celebration of completing the challenge. I remember Esther and I doing exactly the same thing eight years ago. EBC stirs emotions not only for Everest climbers, and that’s something I really like—despite how ugly that stone is.

The last half hour we strolled through EBC once again until we arrived back at our camp. The kitchen crew greeted us with a plate of cheesy potato salad with toast and pizza. I devoured everything and even had a second helping of salad. The pizza wasn’t bad either—I’ve definitely had worse.

Then it was back to the tent to digest, and I also had to put away the duffle bag that arrived this morning from the Lobuche East High Camp. I already laid out the laundry bag too, just in case the sun shines again tomorrow morning. Tomorrow is scheduled as another rest day—perfect for washing and drying a few things.

Afterward, I returned to the dining tent to bring the blog back up to date. Now I’ve already had dinner, chatted with the two South Americans and Val, and I’ve finally finished the blog. It’s almost 9 p.m. now, and every five minutes a Sherpa from the kitchen team pops into the tent to check if I’m still here. So I’ve just decided to upload all the blog posts tomorrow, since I’ll have all day and I’ve written quite a few pages today.

I’m feeling much better than yesterday, and I’m really grateful for that. Days like yesterday, where you're feeling low, just sap too much energy—and I want to hit the mountain at 100%. I’m also really glad that the three climbers currently here are all very pleasant people. We can sit together in silence, laugh, and have deep conversations too. I hope it stays that way as more climbers arrive over the next few days.

Friday, 18th of April - EBC 

The day once again began with waking up in a warm sleeping bag. Judging by the sounds outside, it wasn't going to be the sunniest day. When I finally peeled myself out of the sleeping bag shortly after 8 a.m. and unzipped the tent, I was greeted by about 5 cm of fresh snow and a partly cloudy sky. Juan Pedro was already sitting in the dining tent with a freshly made coffee in hand. We chatted a bit, and shortly afterward, breakfast was served. While we were eating, Valery slipped in, and by 9 a.m., Regina was also at the table. These are currently all the climbers present, although apparently more are expected to arrive today.

Yesterday, I finally met up with Jo, who, after 20 days of trekking and summiting Island Peak, has now arrived at her home base too. I got to know and appreciate her on Manaslu. She’s on Everest as a VIP, which means she has her own dining tent that she’ll be sharing with the six Russians who were also on Manaslu. After we had breakfast, she came over to us for a bit, and we chatted together.

I've now been uploading my blog for an hour and hope I can get everything online despite the snail-paced Wi-Fi.

Part II:
The attentive reader will probably guess where I’m sitting right now. There aren’t many options here. Our dining tent has quieted down a bit again after 21 Russians practically stormed in for lunch yesterday. But let’s start from the beginning and go back to last Friday.

Uploading the blog took me over two hours. That’s because I reorganized the homepage a bit and also had to translate the entire new text into English. I’m curious how many GB that will cost me each time. Shortly after I closed the laptop, lunch arrived. Most of the time, we have some kind of potatoes on our plates, along with either pasta or rice and eggs. Honestly, I can’t remember what exactly we had on Friday, but I do know that I returned every plate empty (Empty Plate No. 8–10?!). I always take my time with meals. Even though the food gets cold quickly, I just can’t scarf it down. And on rest days, you have all the time in the world—so why not enjoy eating slowly, too?

Even before lunch, I’d brought out a puzzle from my tent, which I continued working on during the wait and even while eating. It’s a Chinese wooden puzzle I ordered ages ago for very little money. The shapes of the pieces are different than usual, which helped time pass more easily. After that, I watched the fresh snow melt and once again chatted with Regina and Juan-Pedro.

As I passed by my tent later on, I noticed a small patch of artificial grass in front of it. The day before, the entire path between the tents had already been laid out with it, and I’d joked that they had forgotten my tent. Looks like they caught up on that now. I’m not entirely sure what the point of it is, but a bit of green can’t hurt in this otherwise white, red, and rocky landscape.

On Thursday evening, a group of Sherpas also headed into the Icefall to continue supplying Camp 2 with equipment. Chirring also set out to carry up some gear. He mentioned two tents and “other stuff,” whatever that might mean.

When the sun came out briefly in the afternoon, I decided to do a bit of handwashing. We’re hoping for sunny weather tomorrow, so the clothes should be dry by then at the latest. Doing laundry here is pretty simple: you let the kitchen crew know you want to wash clothes. They heat up a large jug of water and then give you two metal basins, one of which is already filled with hot water. In front of the kitchen tent is the Sherpa laundry station, and if it's free, you're allowed to use it.

I don’t know if I was doing it right—the few Sherpas who passed by the wash station either grinned or watched with mild curiosity before moving along. My approach was as follows: first, I put two or three items of clothing in the empty basin. Then I poured hot water from the other basin using a plastic cup, added a bit of soap, and swirled and rubbed the clothes until the water wasn’t quite so clear anymore. Then I wrung them out slightly and set them aside. I repeated the process until every item had at least briefly come into contact with soap and water. I also emptied the dirty water now and then. Afterward, I rinsed all the clothes again in clean water to get most of the dirt and especially the smell out. Finally, I wrung everything out well and packed it into a bag.

I walked back to our row of tents and carefully hung everything up. Just as I finished, another layer of clouds rolled in, so the clothes got maybe 20 minutes of sun at most. But since I still have plenty of clean clothes, it didn’t really matter. I hung my underwear up inside the tent just in case—it can get unexpectedly windy during the night.

After washing, I returned to the dining tent for the usual evening chats with Valery, Regina, and Juan-Pedro, and my Tolino e-reader. As always, it was straight into the sleeping bag shortly after dinner, either to try the Wi-Fi or to read a bit more.

Saturday, April 19 – EBC – Fiesta Mexicana

Today was marked by brilliant sunshine without even the tiniest cloud in the sky. Contrary to what the kitchen team had told us, no new guests arrived today. Honestly, we were all a bit relieved—somehow, we enjoy the calm and the slower pace without the hustle and bustle.

Once again, I had fried eggs with toast and a piece of fruit for breakfast. Afterward, I wanted to do a bit of reading when Juan-Pedro suddenly said it was too hot inside the tent and he wanted to sit outside for a bit. No sooner said than done—everyone grabbed a chair, and we headed down to our row of tents. At the end of the row, there’s a little spot with a direct view of the Icefall. Juan-Pedro’s tent is there, and from now on we’re calling it his front yard.

I also dragged along a thermos full of black tea, and Dipen came with us to make sure we had everything we needed. It was beautifully calm with no wind, so we sat there in our thin long-sleeved sun hoodies—Juan-Pedro with a Mexican hat, and I even rolled up my pants and went barefoot for a while. Unfortunately, I had forgotten that my legs hadn’t seen the sun in ages. The result came the next day in the form of a rather annoying sunburn on my shins.

But the two hours in the sun were truly enjoyable. We watched climbers on the route through the Icefall or others practicing their techniques on the glacier. We listened to music and sat together in silence. I also brought out the Theos—after all, they also need regular sunlight and fresh air 😊

Valery had set off toward Camp 1 in the morning, and we wondered whether we might catch a glimpse of him somewhere. But the distance was too great to see more than moving figures.

When it was time for lunch, we happily headed toward the dining tent, which was still very warm inside. A bit later, Juan-Pedro went to fetch all the chairs again, and once more we were amazed at how little it takes to be completely out of breath up here. We’re talking about carrying four chairs over 150 meters with about 10 meters of elevation gain.

After lunch, I read a bit more, and when it got cooler, I moved into my tent. Most of the laundry had already dried, so I could bring it back inside. I also changed into my nightwear early because around 4 PM I headed to the coffee tent of the company 8K Expeditions, where I had plans to meet up with some other climbers over a hot chocolate.

The official path goes 20 meters down and back up again, with the tent maybe 400 meters away as the crow flies. But I chose a path through the Sherpa tents, where I got a few odd looks now and then. Still, I made it safely to the coffee tent in about 10 minutes.

There, I met Julia—a Russian who lives in Zermatt. I had exchanged a couple of sentences with her on the way from the summit to Camp 4 on Manaslu. We mostly kept in touch through occasional text messages on Instagram.

Then there was Bianca from Australia—the youngest person to summit Manaslu, whom I also met last year at base camp. When we were all stuck in Samagaun, we had long and meaningful conversations. She’s here now with her father, aiming to become the youngest Australian (male or female) to summit Everest.

Her father had climbed Everest with her mother 20 years ago. Well, her mother summited Everest while Paul had to turn back due to an oxygen tank malfunction—he summited the year after. This will now be his third expedition.

There were also two Brazilians there, but they left shortly after and were replaced by Mitch. I had run into Mitch 1.5 years ago on Ama Dablam. He was on his way back to Camp 1 after his summit, while we were on our way up. We met briefly at the Yellow Tower—the most rockfall-prone section—so we only exchanged a few words. Still, he remembered me when I spoke to him briefly this year in Lukla.

Now we finally had more time to talk. His path to Everest is probably the most impressive I’ve ever heard. His journey started on September 15th: he set out to complete the world’s longest triathlon. First, he swam from England across the Channel to France, then biked from there to India. From India, he ran a series of marathons all the way to Kathmandu. He stayed overnight at the British Embassy there and then followed in Edmund Hillary’s footsteps, trekking to Lukla. After a 10-day rest, he continued to EBC with his trekking group.

Now he’s here, preparing like everyone else for the summit attempt on Mount Everest. If you want to follow his journey in detail, just search for Mitch Hutchcraft on YouTube or Instagram.

After two hours of laughing and chatting, I headed back to our dining tent, where everyone else had already gathered so we could eat dinner together.

 Sunday, April 20 – EBC – Happy Birthday Daddy

 Another rest day was on the agenda today. I’m honestly getting tired of just sitting around—I can hardly wait to finally do something different. But today would have been my dad’s 77th birthday, and I took that as an opportunity to head down to the glacier after breakfast and build a little smiley face and a heart out of stones for him. I took my time—I certainly have enough of it today. It’s actually fun doing things like that out here, since I haven’t really done anything like it since I was a child. 

The sun was shining once again from a cloudless sky, and there wasn’t much wind either. Other than that, today’s summary is simple: I ate three meals, tried multiple times to get the Wi-Fi to work, drank my usual 3 liters of tea and/or water, visited the pee tent regularly, and read an entire book. 

Around 4 p.m., I found myself back in the coffee tent—this time in our own, as it’s now open. We had agreed yesterday to meet there today because it’s bigger than the 8K tent. It was the same crew as yesterday, but this time Bianca’s father was also there, as well as Ewan, a Californian I’d only spoken to briefly at Manaslu, but who still remembered my down suit. Bella was there too—she trekked to EBC with Mitch and is spending a week here. She wants to write a book in the next few years about why people climb 8000-meter peaks and plans to attempt Everest herself in two years. A few days ago, she summited Lobuche East with Mitch’s group, and after leaving EBC, she’ll also be trying Island Peak before heading home at the end of the month. 

She read us her editorial, and we already know the book will be a great one. I’m curious how long it will take before I can hold it in my hands. I’ll have to be patient for a few years, but life has already shown me a few times that the wait is often worth it. 

Today, Mitch and I discovered that our connections to Everest have lasted about the same number of years and have evolved in a similar way. It’s always fascinating talking to him, even though he speaks at a breakneck pace. Luckily, I’m not new to English—otherwise I wouldn’t understand a word. He seems a bit like someone driven by something, who can hardly believe that after all these years, he’s really here to attempt Everest. I feel the same way, and I see the same emotions in his eyes that I feel: disbelief, pride, respect, a little fear, and a whole lot of anticipation. 

During those hours in the coffee tent, we talked about all kinds of things. It’s always fascinating to me how quickly strangers can open up and talk about very personal topics. Everyone is here for a different reason, yet within minutes, we become a kind of community you don’t find anywhere else. Anyone who has been on a mountain expedition will understand that feeling. I won’t even try to explain it further—you simply have to experience it yourself to understand what I mean. Take this as an invitation to sign up for a multi-day trek (no, it doesn’t have to be in the Himalayas) or to plan one on your own and go out and do it. I promise you won’t regret it. 

Around the usual time, it was time to leave the coffee tent—no one wants to be late for dinner. I was greeted by Chirring and Gyalzen, who told me that tomorrow we’d finally be heading onto the glacier for some practice, so that I’ll be ready whenever we’re cleared to move toward Camp 1. After dinner, I packed the essentials into my backpack so I’d be ready to go in the morning. 

 Monday, April 21 – EBC – Glacier Training

 Another sunny day awaited me as I stepped out of the tent this morning. Embarrassingly, the kitchen crew had to come get me out of my tent because I mistakenly thought breakfast was at 8:30 a.m. Since Saturday, it’s actually been at 8:00, and I had simply forgotten. I’d been awake since 6:30 a.m., as usual, just couldn’t convince myself to get up. So at 8:15, Dipen had to come down to my tent to check if everything was okay. I felt a bit ashamed, since I usually make a point of being on time. The kitchen crew, led by Nathi, does an excellent job, and I don’t want to make things harder for them. They fulfill every request, listen to us, and do everything to make sure we’re well taken care of. I’m deeply impressed every day by how much love and attention to detail they put into their work and how much we matter to them. Being late feels like a no-go. But they took it with humor, and five minutes later I was already sitting in front of another plate of toast and a hot veggie omelet. 

I took my time eating, and at 9 a.m., Gyalzen showed up to tell me we’d be heading out around 9:30. After breakfast, I went back to the tent to change clothes for training. I wanted to pack all my gloves so I could practice with each pair and mentally prepare myself for the first steps in my big boots since Manaslu. Regina and Juan-Pedro would also be practicing on the glacier today, so we all met at 10 a.m. at the already prepared course. 

The goal for me was to get back into the rhythm of walking on ladders, using the ascender, and rappelling. The first round was a disaster. I tried to drive the front points of my crampons into the ice, where they wouldn’t hold. Still, I put my full weight on the spikes, which promptly slipped. Within two minutes, I had two aching knees and started questioning what I was doing here. I know I can do better than that—it just seemed like I needed a few minutes to get my head back into it. Completely out of breath and in pain, I reached the top. My harness was also a bit too tight, and it felt like breakfast was about to come back out—one way or another. So I took a few minutes on the platform to calm down and focus on the short traverse. That part went fine, although I didn’t fully trust my crampons yet. 

The final part was rappelling, and Gyalzen insisted on clipping the rope into my device for me. Strangely enough, the 11-meter vertical wall didn’t bother me at all, and I was back down in half a minute. Still, I wasn’t happy with my first run. The pain in my knees would probably stick around for a few days—totally unnecessary. While Regina and Juan-Pedro were doing their run, I took some time to drink and focus on what I can do. I practiced a few rounds on the ladder and quickly remembered how to position the steps under my boots. I also tried to lean forward so that the rope would stay taut without help from Gyalzen or Chirring. I really hope I can manage that on the actual route—there, the ladders will be hanging above deep glacier crevasses. 

The second round went much better. I took more time to place my front points properly, and I’d adjusted the harness beforehand. Luckily, the sore knees didn’t really slow me down, and after just under five minutes, I was back at the bottom. I kept going for a while longer, doing multiple rounds on the ropes and constantly switching gloves so I could practice every motion with liner gloves, thick fingered gloves, and even my heaviest mitts. When I had to wait, I crossed the ladder a few more times and made sure to climb both to the left and right of the rope and switch arms so I wouldn’t build habits and would tire my arm muscles evenly. The Icefall route changes all the time, so I want to be mentally prepared for that. 

After just under two hours, the training session wrapped up and we packed everything away. I was content and just hoped I wouldn’t be sore the next day—otherwise, it would really shake my confidence. The normal duration through the Icefall is 6–8 hours, so if I was already sore after 2 hours of training, that would be a bit discouraging. 

We headed back to the dining tent for lunch, as usual. When we arrived, there was a bit of commotion—apparently 21 Russians were expected for lunch, trekking toward EBC. Luckily, we were able to eat in peace before they arrived. As soon as someone said they were five minutes away, I gathered my things and made my way to the coffee tent. On the way, I passed the group—some of them looked totally wiped out. I greeted a few, but got no response, so I left it at that and disappeared into the coffee tent. I was enjoying a hot chocolate when one of the Russian women—probably a guide—came in and started talking on the phone with Tashi. Tashi owns 14peaks, and his brother runs a helicopter company. Apparently, some of the trekkers wanted to fly straight back to Namche or Kathmandu—they didn’t want to spend another minute at altitude. During lunch, the kitchen crew told me that five of them were planning to stay and attempt Everest. Turns out they’re the same five I briefly encountered at Manaslu Base Camp last year. We had our own dining tent then, so we only interacted with them outdoors or in the coffee tent. They usually sat outside on rest days, one of them smoking a pipe, and in the evenings you could hear guitar music coming from their tent. 

I wasn’t alone in the coffee tent for long—soon Bella, Bianca, Mitch, Ben, Ewan, and the rest trickled in, and we stayed there until just before 6 p.m. At some point in between, I went to my tent to put on warmer clothes. Once the sun goes down, it gets significantly colder. It also helps to change while the tent is still a bit warm, not after dinner when it’s already freezing. 

I wasn’t particularly looking forward to dinner. The Russians had taken over the whole dining tent, and thankfully Regina and Juan-Pedro were there and saved me a seat. So the three of us squeezed into a corner of the table to eat. The other two left shortly after dinner, and I didn’t stay in the tent much longer either. Some people were coughing, and I felt too cramped in the corner, as if I couldn’t get enough air to breathe. I tried to decline the piece of cake they offered me—unsuccessfully—so out of politeness, I ate two or three spoonfuls and then slipped off to my tent. There, I read a little more and hoped for a calmer day tomorrow. 

 Tuesday, April 22 – EBC

 The night was quiet once again, although I woke up two or three times as people were still heading to bed late in the evening. It seemed like the dining tent had been occupied longer than usual. I headed over a bit earlier than normal this morning to make sure I could get a seat at the table with Regina and Juan-Pedro. They were already there, having their breakfast. They were leaving us for 3–4 days to climb Lobuche East. I'm curious to see what these days will be like without them—they’ve always been great listeners and conversational partners, and we share a similar sense of humor. I hope their outing will be worth it and that they’ll return well-acclimatized and happy. 

After saying goodbye to them, I went back to my tent to enjoy a bit of peace and quiet. The trekking Russians also left after breakfast, so by around 10 a.m., the dining tent had quieted down again. As I sat there, Dipen from the kitchen crew let me know that another large group would be arriving for lunch today—this time, 14 Indians. I got my lunch a little earlier again, so I was already in the middle of eating when the Indian group stormed into the tent. Within moments, I was surrounded by them, as the whole group wanted to sit together at one table, even though the other table was half empty. So I picked up my lunch and switched tables so they could have their wish granted. 

I followed the same strategy as yesterday—after lunch, I disappeared into the coffee tent, where I once again had top-notch company with the usual suspects for the entire afternoon. This time, Nelly Attar joined us as well—she’s known on social media, among other things, for her mountain clean-up campaigns. 

Right at 6 p.m., we parted ways again—I was hoping dinner would be a bit less chaotic this time. I sat from the start at the table with the Russians to make sure the Indians would have enough space. But as soon as I’d eaten, I made my way to the Seven Summit Treks camp. Most of my coffee tent friends were staying there, and they’d invited me many times to come over if things got too boring, cramped, or noisy on my side. 

Just ten minutes later, I was sitting in a warm tent full of funny and open people. They were still in the middle of their dinner, but were happy to see me. I ended up staying almost two hours, during which I analyzed photos from Paul, Bianca’s father, of his Everest summits in 2006 and 2007. It gave me a great overview of parts of the route I hadn’t seen in pictures before. It was also interesting to hear about his experiences and what he focused on during his second climb. 

We even started planning a joint acclimatization hike to Pumori High Camp for tomorrow—but that plan was crushed half an hour later when the Base Camp Manager gave a briefing announcing Seven Summit’s schedule for tomorrow: glacier training in the morning and oxygen training in the afternoon. 

Around 9:30 p.m., I made my way back to our camp, quickly filled my bottles with hot water in the dining tent, and then slipped into my sleeping bag. 

 Wednesday, April 23 – Pumori High Camp

 Today was another acclimatization day. Since Chirring and Gyalzen set off towards Camp 2 last night, I was going to be out on my own today. It was almost funny how motherly the two of them were yesterday when I told them I’d be fine going solo. They told me exactly what to pack (the same stuff I’ve been packing for the past three weeks), that I should apply sunscreen in the morning, and not hike too fast—as if I’d never been out on my own back home. But it shows me how much they care about making sure I’m well-prepared, and also that they trust me at least a little. I promised them I’d check in as soon as I got back and take good care of myself, especially on the way down. 

So after breakfast, I set out just before 9 a.m. toward the lower end of EBC. That part takes about 20 minutes. The famous EBC rock marks the start of base camp, and no matter what time of day you pass by, someone’s always posing in front of, on, or around it. After about half an hour, I was already on the ridge that lines the edge of the glacier, ready for the steep climb toward High Camp. I took the path I remembered, but clearly veered a bit off course near some rocks. I ended up in a scree field and had to fight my way through it slowly and carefully—big rocks, small rocks, slippery rocks, solid rocks, gravel, scree, and dirt—I worked my way in the right direction. I knew I’d reconnect with the path at some point, and after 40 minutes, I saw a small group climbing just above me. Less than five minutes later, I was back on the trail. 

I decided to follow that group to make sure I didn’t lose the path again. That worked well—they were hiking just a bit faster than the pace I’d set for myself. I was walking at a rhythm where I could easily recite "Om mani padme om" in sync with my steps. When the group took a break, I continued on alone, since the path was still clearly visible. About 20 meters below the first platform of High Camp, I took a wrong turn again and had to scramble a bit. But since the slope wasn’t steep and the rocks were solid, it wasn’t a problem. 

Beyond the platform, I could see another faint trail heading further up, so I continued another 50 meters of elevation until I found a good spot to sit in the shelter of the wind. I spent a good hour there enjoying the view. I’d also brought the two Theos with me today, so they had to pose for a few photos too. There were two other groups there—I took some group shots for them, and they returned the favor by taking pictures of me. 

After just under 70 minutes, I packed everything up and started heading back. The path was easier to follow on the way down, and I always had a group in sight to help guide me, just in case. Only 30 minutes after setting off, I was already back on the side ridge along the glacier. My legs felt great both on the way up and down. I did get a bit more out of breath than expected while scrambling, but that’s probably because I moved a bit faster than I’d planned. 

Since I knew my tentmate from Aconcagua, Rebekka, had arrived at EBC yesterday, I didn’t want to miss the chance to visit her at her camp. She’s with Furtenbach, whose camp is near the lower end. Around 12:30 p.m., I walked into their dining tent and saw her surprised face. I was immediately offered a drink and invited to stay for lunch, but I’d promised my kitchen crew I’d eat with them, so I politely declined. Still, I really enjoyed the 40-minute visit—we caught up on small things. Hopefully, we’ll find more time to talk properly. Last time we saw each other was in Salzburg, when I spontaneously visited her for 24 hours in October while she was on vacation there. Mitch happened to be there too, having been invited to lunch by the company heads. 

When the group was called for their Puja ceremony, I set off again and walked the last 20 minutes back to my camp. I went straight to the dining tent so they’d know I made it back safely. Then I changed quickly so I could be somewhat clean for lunch. Unfortunately, I already had a bit of a headache, so I had to force myself to eat. It took me almost an hour to get through half the salad, and another 20 minutes for the small fruit plate for dessert. I drank a few cups of tea, but none of it helped get rid of the headache. 

For the first time since being here, I spent the second half of the afternoon in my sleeping bag, dozing a bit. I took a pill to ease the headache, but it didn’t fully work, so I still felt a bit drained by the time dinner came around. Even then, I couldn’t eat everything and went straight back to bed after brushing my teeth. I read for a bit, but with the headache, I just didn’t feel all that great. 

 Thursday, April 24 – EBC – Puja at Seven Summit Treks 

After going to bed with a headache last night, I had a rather restless night. Unlike usual, I had to get up twice during the night to pee. I saw headlamps in the Icefall each time, but they were moving much more slowly than on the nights when the Sherpas were out. I also had to take a second pill in order to get at least some sleep. When I woke up this morning, there was still a dull throbbing. I assume it’s coming from my neck, as the pillow is unfortunately too high, so my neck muscles can’t really relax. We’ll see if it improves over the next few days or not. 

In any case, I got up on time for breakfast and ate the vegetable omelette with Tibetan bread. Afterwards, I read a little, briefly talked with one of the Russian women, Anastasiia, who is unfortunately a bit sick, and then decided to do a bit of laundry again. Just like for the past week, the weather is wonderfully sunny, though very windy. That didn’t bother me—I still washed and hung up a few shirts, pants, and buffs. Nathi even gave me some clothespins so the clothes wouldn’t blow away. 

Then I headed over to the Seven Summit Treks camp, where the Puja ceremony was taking place today. I was able to watch the whole thing from the outside, which was actually quite nice for a change. Still, it felt strange that all my friends were being blessed, and I had to imagine experiencing the same ceremony tomorrow with almost complete strangers. People put rice flour on their faces, congratulate and hug each other, etc. All things I would have loved to be part of today—but could only watch from the sidelines. 

I hope tomorrow will feel warmer and more heartfelt than I’m imagining it now. Ideally, Regina and Juan-Pedro will also be back tomorrow, so at least I’ll have two familiar faces around. I didn’t feel like I belonged, even though—aside from not participating—there wasn’t really a reason for that. After the blessing, everyone stood in small groups, took photos, laughed, filmed videos, and I was just a passive observer. 

At least I finally got to thank Kristin Harila today for what she’s doing for us women in mountaineering. She’s one of the reasons I had the courage to finally take on Everest. I had reached out to her 2–3 times over the past three years, and she always responded thoughtfully. Being able to finally thank her in person for how important she’s been to me and my project makes me incredibly happy. Of course, it didn’t happen without tears this time either. I have no idea what it is about Everest that does this to me. I’m just so happy and proud, and I almost can’t express it without tears. Especially when I think that the 28 years I’ve been waiting for this have now been condensed into just one month. 

When all the blessed climbers gathered for a group photo, that was my cue to head back to my tent. I cuddled with the Theos and let out the rest of my tears. Then I checked on my almost-dry laundry and made my way to the dining tent, where lunch will be served in about half an hour. 


Friday, April 25 – EBC – Puja 

Yesterday's lunch was, surprisingly, a burger – maybe with a bit too much cheese, but otherwise quite good. Afterwards, I went to my tent to tidy up my clothes and enjoy a bit of time to myself. Then I headed to the dining tent to finish writing the blog. To upload it, I moved a bit closer to the router – aka the coffee tent – where I tried to get something done over two hot chocolates. Unfortunately, the upload didn’t go as planned, so I enlisted my sister as a blog assistant. 

Just as I was about to leave the coffee tent, Mitch and Stan showed up. So I treated myself to a third cup of hot chocolate and had a nice chat with them about the Puja, the schedule, and more. It’s always interesting talking with those two. Stan only stays in EBC part-time – his base is three hours away at the Italian Pyramid. He spends most of his time editing Mitch’s YouTube videos and Instagram content so that everything gets finished on time. To be honest, I haven’t watched any of the YouTube videos yet, but I’ll catch up after the expedition. I think the two of them are looking forward to the "after" just as much as I am. 

I already find the expedition mentally exhausting, but I don’t have to think about paying employees, producing content, writing press releases, etc., and I’m honestly glad about that. Here in EBC, I can pretty much live day by day. I wouldn’t even have to write this blog if I didn’t want to – I could just read, sleep, hydrate, and wait until I get to climb. I think I’ve only posted on Instagram three times in the last four weeks, and only because everyone around me was posting, and I could mostly copy their content. Even after Manaslu, I didn’t really feel like posting anything on social media – somehow it just doesn’t feel that important to me. 

Anyway, the conversation with those two really did me good, and finally, I started to feel some excitement about my Puja. 

I can’t really remember what we had for dinner – probably Veggie Sizzler, since we’ve had that three times already. After that, I went straight to bed to be ready for the Puja today. 

The Puja took place shortly after breakfast. I was one of the first ones there and managed to get a great seat – even with a rock for back support, just in case. But first, I had to get my gear and place it at the shrine. Two days ago, Furtenbach said that we should bring anything that would touch the mountain. I always bring everything that gives me a sense of safety on the mountain: boots, crampons, harness, and helmet. Since I was one of the first again, my gear was placed right by the shrine – I take that as a good omen. Then I sat down and read a little until everyone else was ready. 

For the Pujas, a Lama always comes with an assistant. The Lama chants (or rather, sings) prayers, while the assistant occasionally beats a small drum, and the Lama also clashes cymbal-like instruments. The purpose of the Puja is to ask for a "safe passage" – meaning a safe ascent and descent. Prayers are chanted for all the mountains surrounding Everest, as well as for Everest itself. Rice and/or rice powder is thrown into the air during the ceremony. 

We listeners were given some black tea from time to time to stay hydrated, and I was grateful to be wearing both a hat and a buff – it was quite windy and sunny. 

At the end of the Puja, everyone received a yellow string bracelet and a khata scarf around their neck. The yellow string should not be removed, as it offers protection. The khata also symbolizes protection but can be taken off later. I've hung all the khatas I’ve received so far in my tent and will take them home, like everyone else. Anyone who’s visited my place in the last three years will probably remember the white scarves hanging everywhere. 

Since I once again want to hang prayer flags on the summit, I had bought a few in Kathmandu that now needed to be blessed. Pengboche would have been a good time for that, but I had packed the prayer flags in my climbing duffle, which went missing for a while during the trek. So now, Chirring asked the Lama if he could bless the flags – which he did without hesitation. 

We also took a few group photos so we could remember this day. Afterward, I went into the dining tent, as it was quite windy outside. After the meal, Chirring, Gyalzen, and I were going to sit down together and work out a new schedule – so I’d have a better sense of what’s planned and wouldn’t get too caught up in negative thoughts just because everyone else is heading out on their rotations before me, even though I was the first one in base camp. 

The Sherpas’ suggestion was to do a dry run in the Icefall tomorrow. This means going up about halfway and then coming back down. In Chirring's words, it was: 3 hours up, 1 hour down. My suggestion was to start the rotation so that we would be ready for the summit after 5 days on the mountain, once the fixing team had finished their work. 

I didn’t really like the Sherpa suggestion, because, firstly, I didn’t want to spend too many unnecessary hours in the Icefall, and secondly, I finally wanted to start my rotation. I also feared that if I waited any longer, I would be in the Icefall with too many other people, which would bring long waiting times, cold, and risks. I also asked Phunuru what he thought of the plan. Unfortunately, he had no internet and couldn’t give me an answer. It was also hard to get a somewhat reliable weather report because the Wi-Fi was, once again, very slow. It’s one of those moments where you have to make a decision, and only later (maybe) will you find out if you made the right or wrong choice. 

I have two guiding principles that I want to stick to here on Everest: I want to attempt the summit during the first weather window, and I want to make sure that all three of us have at least 3 rest days before that. I want to use the first weather window because, based on experience, there aren’t as many people on the mountain yet since they’re not ready. The three rest days for all of us should be clear to everyone – we need to be well-rested when we make our double attempt, including Chirring and Gyalzen, since they play such a big role in our safety on the mountain. 

Our discussion after dinner wasn’t too long, because the two of them didn’t want to be swayed from their plan, and I wasn’t born to be the boss, so I didn’t want to force my suggestion on them. I was still torn between “spend as little time as possible in the Icefall” and “just trust the Sherpas,” but I didn’t want to make the decision alone. So, we agreed that we would all think about the options some more, I would try to get a weather report, and we would discuss it again at dinner. 

Afterwards, I went once again to the coffee tent, where I met the usual suspects. I also had a brief chat with Paul, who has a lot of Everest experience. He said that he also did a dry run back in the day and actually found it quite useful. Still, the general consensus was that everyone would rather start the rotation than do a dry run. To me, the reason for the dry run wasn’t clear, not even after the meeting with Chirring and Gyalzen in the afternoon. It felt unnecessary, and because I didn’t understand it, the plan bothered me even more after the conversations. 

Once again, Stan helped me avoid getting stuck in negative thoughts. He was able to explain to me rationally that it’s not a big deal if I don’t start the rotation like everyone else. There is still plenty of time, and he’s confident that, no matter which option we choose, I will still have a real shot at the summit. I also got distracted from my thoughts when we had an interesting conversation with Kristin about her numerous expeditions. She is waiting for her helicopter permit in China to finally find the Sherpa who was swept away by an avalanche on Shishapangma on my birthday in 2023. 

For those who don’t know Kristin Harila: She broke the speed record for climbing all 14 8000-meter peaks. It only took her 92 days to achieve this. In 2022, she made her first attempt and stood on 13 out of 14 peaks. Unfortunately, she was denied permission by China to climb Shishapangma, so her attempt failed, and Nimsdai remained the record holder. Nimsdai is the Nepali climber behind the amazing Netflix film (and book) 14 Peaks. She told us yesterday that the moment she got the “no” from China, she knew she would make another attempt in 2023. That year, she shuffled the order of her climbs and actually got permission from China for Shishapangma and Cho Oyu in the spring. Both peaks are climbed from China, although Cho Oyu can theoretically also be climbed from Nepal, which is extremely difficult (Gelje from AGA Adventures managed to achieve this last year after the route had been abandoned for a long time – just google it). 

Back to Kristin: Once she had the permits, she climbed all 14 peaks in those 92 days, always with her Sherpa Lama by her side. They were celebrated worldwide for this, and now it was clear to everyone that Lama is the best Sherpa around. While Kristin was chasing the record, two American women were in a race to become the first American women to climb all 14 8000-meter peaks. Their names were Anna and Gina-Marie, and both had already summited 13 peaks, only missing Shishapangma. They both received permits, and Gina-Marie wanted the best Sherpa by her side. So, Lama, even though he didn’t have to, went to China once more to help her succeed. 

Shishapangma is already a dangerous mountain in the spring, but in the autumn, it’s even more dangerous due to its steep slopes, which are perfect for avalanches. On my 39th birthday, the mountain had had enough and buried both Gina-Marie’s team and Anna Gutu’s team with her Sherpa. All four died, though Anna and her Sherpa were found and brought home last year. Gina-Marie and Lama are still somewhere on the mountain, and Kristin has made it her goal to bring his body back. I think she will only find peace with her life once she has accomplished this. She takes great care of Lama’s family, especially his two sons; she was trekking with the younger one, who is now back in Kathmandu in school. 

These coffee tent conversations are the heart of this expedition and, for me, and I think for many others as well, they are very important. The great community comes together here, and everyone is in the same boat. Everyone I have spoken to so far is extremely open. It doesn’t matter whether you’ve climbed one 8000-meter peak or already 27. It doesn’t matter whether you’re here "just" for the trek or for the triple crown (Everest, Lhotse, Nuptse). You sit together at the table, listen to each other, and the depth of the conversations comes very quickly. I’ve mentioned before that it was very important for me to thank Kristin for her extraordinary achievement. I feel deeply sorry that such a negative impact has affected her life. Positive and negative are so closely intertwined, and I’m certainly not the only one hoping that Kristin will soon get the permit and find Lama’s body this spring. 

As I walked back to my dining tent in thought, a nice dinner was waiting for me, which helped me feel a bit more positive. I wasn’t able to find a weather report, but I did manage to get a wind report from our camp doctor. After dinner, Chirring and Gyalzen returned, and together we discussed the wind report in front of our tent. After a few minutes, a Sherpa came around the corner with a radio and told them something. Apparently, an avalanche from Nuptse had hit the route between Camp 1 and Camp 2, causing the route to be temporarily interrupted. This was a reason for my Sherpas to stick with the dry run. I accepted this decision, and we agreed that we would leave at 6 am. They also informed me about what I would need to pack, mainly warm clothing, as it would be very windy tomorrow, and we didn’t know how many people we would encounter in the Icefall. 

I immediately went to the tent to pack my things and then lay down in bed, planning to have breakfast at 5 am so that I wouldn’t end up in the same situation as during the training, when the food couldn’t decide whether to come up or down. Just before going to sleep, I wanted to quickly check my messages and Instagram. There, I saw that, apparently, a part of the route in the Icefall had collapsed in the past few hours. All those who had planned to start their rotation at night canceled their plans and stayed in the EBC. I lay in bed and had to admit to myself that I should really trust Chirring and Gyalzen’s suggestions 100%. Because their suggestion for the dry run now seemed perfect, since we wouldn’t have been able to go any further anyway. I took this as a sign from Everest, showing me that I have very capable Sherpas and that I should trust myself as well. I’ve already verbally told many people that since my first visit to the Khumbu Valley in 2017, I’ve felt a connection to my dream mountain. Once again, I felt that connection right now, lying in my sleeping bag in the EBC, and I made a resolution to trust Everest, that it would give me my chance. 



 Saturday, April 26 – Dry Run in the Icefall

 It felt strange to be woken up by an alarm again today. For the past 2–3 weeks, I had always woken up early enough on my own since I was also going to bed early. But now the clock said 4:30 a.m. I stayed in my warm sleeping bag for another 10 minutes until I felt mentally ready to crawl out. I had already put my clothes into the sleeping bag the night before, so I could get dressed inside the bag. Then I checked once more that everything I needed was in my backpack: I packed my down pants, my thick down jacket, thick gloves, and hand warmers—after all, I didn’t want to have to turn back because of cold fingers. My thermos bottles also went into the backpack, along with sunscreen, etc. 

At 5 a.m., I headed to the kitchen tent. Dipen had told me yesterday to just stop by the kitchen tent, and someone would make me black tea. I had planned to eat just cornflakes so they wouldn’t have to cook too much so early in the morning. Unfortunately, the kitchen tent was still closed and deserted at 5 a.m. So I sat in the cold dining tent and ate my cornflakes. Without tea, it was a pretty dry experience, but there wasn’t much I could do about it. At 5:10, I heard the stove light up in the kitchen tent and realized I’d just been overly Swiss about being on time at exactly 5 a.m. 

So I went down and was warmly greeted by Nathi. He made me two cups of tea and would’ve even cooked something for me if I had let him. After that, I went to my tent to put on my big boots. It only takes about five minutes down here, but I always have to focus to make sure there are no folds in my socks or thermals—otherwise, I risk blisters. I also tried taping my usual problem spot on my lower leg. Note to self: tape doesn’t stick to human skin in subzero temperatures. Once I was ready, I made one more stop at the pee tent—because let’s be honest, you don’t want to die in the Icefall with your pants down just because you couldn’t outrun a chunk of ice 😉. 

Lastly, I put on my climbing harness so I wouldn’t have to do it in the cold of the Icefall. Chirring and Gyalzen were ready as well, and after another hot cup of tea, we first headed to our Puja shrine, circled it once clockwise, and then took a fairly direct route down to the glacier. It took us about 30 minutes to reach the Crampon Point, which was different from the one we visited about two weeks ago. The first part of the route mostly leads over flat glacier ice and rocks, so it’s easy to walk the first 30 minutes without crampons. 

Then came the final bathroom break before putting on crampons and getting into the real thing. Interestingly, we still had another 30 minutes of mostly rock, although it was steeper and sometimes covered in meltwater. Surprisingly, the crampons actually gave great traction. Just before the first vertical section, we encountered the only people coming in the opposite direction—a Westerner and his Sherpa. That was also the Crampon Point for the Icefall Doctors. We figured this out when six of them showed up, getting ready to enter the Icefall to repair the collapsed section. 

We, meanwhile, headed to the base of the first vertical section to use our ascenders for the first time. I tried to stick to the rhythm that worked for me on Manaslu: step, breathe in and out deeply twice, step, breathe deeply twice, and so on. It takes longer to get to the top that way, but I never get out of breath and can focus on technique. Chirring was ahead of me, Gyalzen behind. The Sherpa version of this section is a little different: wait for a gap, then take 5–6 fast steps, wait again, repeat. It feels more like intervals, which is why I don’t do it that way. I also think it’s nicer for anyone waiting below to see steady progress rather than someone standing still for five minutes catching their breath. 

Now we were really in the Icefall—ascending, descending, clipping in and out—and I tried to focus on the route. Chirring would wait for me at each anchor to hold the rope I needed to clip into next. On ascents, I felt like I got out of breath quickly, but after a 10-second pause, I always recovered fast. We had to jump over a small crevasse and passed a spot that made me nervous—narrow icy steps that looked like they wouldn’t hold my weight. But since Chirring, who’s a bit heavier, went ahead, I tried to trust the steps. I’m pretty sure they’ll be gone next time—they were that thin. 

After an unknown amount of time—somewhere between 30 minutes and 15 hours—we reached an open area that looked like an avalanche cone. Above the Icefall on the right is a glacier section that regularly breaks off, and the route passes through its debris. Luckily, it’s fairly flat there, so we passed through in under a minute. Still, I asked which direction to run in case something came down at the wrong time. Despite the visible dangers, I felt totally comfortable and didn’t perceive the Icefall as threatening. The path was wide, I saw plenty of passing spots, and there were no threatening seracs in sight. So we continued. 

We crossed three ladders, all (in my opinion) used correctly: in vertical sections, usually to enter steep ice walls followed by another 10-meter climb. All of these had small steps to clearly place your feet and 2–3 ropes for rappelling even if someone was climbing up. One ladder section looked like a potential bottleneck, though, as the rappel ropes met the ascent path. Curious to see if I’ll get stuck there someday. At least there's a decently safe waiting area, though probably very cold. 

About two hours in, Chirring and Gyalzen suddenly seemed a bit nervous. I asked if this was a spot where we should move faster—they nodded. So I “ran” behind Chirring. "Ran" is an exaggeration—I just walked at my normal pace from home. Anything faster isn’t possible at this altitude anyway. After a few minutes, I needed a break, which thankfully I was given. We ducked under and between seracs, went up and down again, then climbed onto a cornice. Now we were really in the heart of the Icefall—and I was still enjoying it. 

Shortly after, the route split into two: the old and the new path. We followed the new one, but a large, stable-looking ice chunk dropped a meter when Chirring stepped on it. That made my brain go into overdrive—it really looked solid. Chirring hesitated, clearly trusting the old route more. So he crossed about five meters of ice blocks, secured only to his climbing harness. I was relieved when we could clip into the rope again. We took our first real break there—before that, we only had a couple of short water or breathing pauses. 

Chirring said we’d go another 10–15 minutes and then turn back. Exactly 10 minutes later, we reached the point where part of the route had collapsed during the night. We stood at the end of the fixed rope and saw an Icefall Doctor about 100 meters ahead. It looked like they were trying to repair the route from above. For us, it meant turning back after exactly 2 hours and 26 minutes. My watch showed 5,694 meters—roughly 400 meters above base camp. According to Gyalzen, we were halfway to Camp 1. Based on the altitude reading, that seems about right. Distance-wise, I’m not so sure. But since I didn’t feel tired, I’m confident I could make it to Camp 1 at that pace—whenever the time comes. 

As we turned back on the narrow ridge, I noticed a huge hole on the right—the collapsed route. But the left side didn’t have much snow either. I realized we were standing on a not-very-stable, undercut cornice. That made me pick up the pace for at least the first five minutes. Going mostly downhill now, we moved much faster. Gyalzen was now ahead, Chirring behind. Unfortunately, Gyalzen was 1% less gentlemanly than Chirring, so I often had to bend down to grab and clip the rope myself. 

We retraced our route toward Crampon Point. On the vertical sections we ascended with ascenders earlier, we now rappelled down. So we were back at the Crampon Point after only 50 minutes, took off crampons and harnesses, and hiked the last stretch over rock—which is tricky in crampons. I had to stay super focused, as getting injured now would just be dumb. I was relieved to remove the crampons and walk the rest without them. Still downhill and requiring attention, but easier. I was back in my tent shortly after 10 a.m., where I changed into my base camp clothes. It had warmed up quite a bit on the way back, and I try to avoid sweating if I can. 

I stayed in the tent a bit, prepped a laundry bag, put everything back in its place, set my boots outside to dry in the sun, and messaged Raphael to let him know I was back. I think he was the only one who knew about my dry run—so no one else had any Once I connected to the Wi-Fi, I finally received a response from Phunuru to the question I had asked him yesterday. So I decided to give him a call. The connection was perfect, which allowed us to talk for almost half an hour about the best plan for the next three weeks. The goal now, assuming a good weather forecast, is to start our rotation on Monday, April 28, and spend five nights in the Western Cwm. That way, we should have at least three rest days before we go on our summit rotation. It would also give Chirring and Gyalzen enough time to bring the oxygen bottles to the right locations and get enough rest afterward. 

During the call, I munched on a few things from my still massive snack stash and then headed to the dining tent for lunch. I was lucky—it was Italian pasta, and under the incredulous eyes of the kitchen crew, I asked for seconds. After all, I had only had a single bowl of cornflakes for breakfast, and recovery works best with carbs. 

Although I was a bit tired from getting up so early, I didn’t want to nap. So I finished reading my book and then, once again, made my way to the coffee tent. I think by now this routine is no surprise to anyone 😊 

In the coffee tent, I chatted a bit with Bianca and Mitch, and just as I was about to leave, Gabi came in. I took another half hour to catch up with her—to hear how her research was going and what she’d been up to the last few days. I hadn’t seen her since Wednesday or so. Since she was the first person I met here at EBC, I’m always especially happy when we get to see each other again. reason 





 Sunday, April 27 – EBC

 Today was another rest day, which means no alarm clock. As usual, I lay awake in my sleeping bag for half an hour to 45 minutes before changing clothes inside it and finally peeling myself out. Breakfast is always at the same time, 8 a.m., but not everyone manages to be on time every day. About two weeks ago, I started ordering a thermos of black tea, which now reliably shows up five minutes after I arrive at the table. That way, I can ensure I drink enough, since the thermos holds three liters of black tea. I usually manage to finish it by the time lunch is over, and then I don’t drink quite as much in the afternoon. Especially in the evening, I try to limit myself to two cups with dinner so that I don’t have to get up at night to pee. So far, that’s been working well—I’ve only had to get up twice at night, and I’ve been on the road for almost a month now. 

After breakfast, I headed to the kitchen tent again to ask for hot water to wash up. I’ve made it a habit to do a bit of laundry on sunny rest days. Not because it’s absolutely necessary, but because it gives me the feeling that I’m doing at least something useful while just sitting around. This time it was my pajama thermals’ turn—a thin pair of long merino underwear and a thin merino sweater, which I’ve worn every night since the first day of the trek. I also washed a set of underwear and a buff. People still smile at me when they see me washing in front of the kitchen tent, but since it’s more about the act than actual cleanliness, I still don’t try too hard while washing 😉. Then I packed my few things and hung them in the sun by my tent. Last time, Nathi gave me some clothespins, which I of course used again today—even though it was quite windless. 

Afterward, I turned to my laptop since I finally wanted to update the blog. Unfortunately, the battery only lasted about 1.5 hours, so I spent the rest of the time until lunch playing games on my phone. Even after lunch, that remained my main activity since I finished my seventh book yesterday and felt I needed a short reading break. I’m assuming I’ll have enough reading time during the upcoming rotation. I definitely haven’t regretted buying the Tolino two years ago—not for a second on these expeditions. 

As the afternoon went on, more and more clouds rolled in, and I even heard some distant thunder. It looks like the bad weather that was forecast is on its way. I already saw the first snowflakes falling outside, which I took as a sign to check on my laundry. Surprisingly, it was almost dry. Only the top was still a little damp, so I hung it in the tent roof, where the sun had warmed things up nicely. The rest I packed back into the designated bags, which serve as my improvised wardrobe. There’s one bag for tops, one for thick thermals, one for underwear, one for socks, and one for used socks. Then there’s an entertainment bag and three full snack bags, and by now I’m starting to wonder when I’m actually going to eat all that. Back home, it seemed like far too little. But here, the tables in the dining tent are full of food—you could practically eat 24/7 and there’d still be plenty left for others. 

Back in the dining tent, I decided there was still enough time to do one of the puzzles I brought. So I cleared a corner of the table and started on a unicorn puzzle with lots of dark colors and sparkles. I got it last summer from Raphael’s sister Daniela, and while the image isn’t exactly my favorite, I had the time so I left the timer off for once and fought my way through the pieces on the uneven tablecloth. During the 1.5 hours of puzzling, I also chatted a bit with Dipen about his goals and future. He’s doing an excellent job here, and at 26 years old, he still has many dreams he wants to chase. He came to base camp a few weeks ago with his father, uncle, and a friend of his father. The other three work for the same company but in a different kitchen tent (the Chinese kitchen). 

Two weeks ago, however, the father’s friend had a heart attack and was flown by helicopter to Kathmandu. Sadly, he didn’t survive, so the three others also flew to Kathmandu to attend the funeral. We didn’t hear anything about this while we were just sitting out our rest days. Dipen seems happy to have some family nearby, but he’s also looking forward to returning to Kathmandu and focusing on his future. He wants to travel the world and start by getting his trekking guide certification, which involves 26 days of theory in Kathmandu and another two weeks of fieldwork. His English is very good—much better than most of the kitchen crew’s—and I’m convinced he won’t be working in a kitchen for many more seasons. I really hope he achieves his goals soon. He’s a daily highlight, and I’m grateful I get to enjoy the fruits of his labor here. 

After finishing the puzzle, I headed over to the coffee tent for a hot chocolate. Unfortunately, there was no one I knew there this time, so I didn’t stay long. It was also quite full again, which increases the risk of catching something—more so than when the tent is empty. On the way back to the dining tent, I made a detour to my tent to start getting ready for the night once again: putting on thermals, packing toothbrush, toothpaste, and headlamp, emptying water bottles if needed, and bringing them along. 

In the dining tent, I had a good connection and was able to call Raphael for a bit, since the school holidays ended today and I wanted to know how things were going at home with the five little ones. I also finally managed to charge my laptop, since electricity only becomes available after 6 p.m., when the generators are turned on. For dinner, I had rice and vegetables, which I dutifully finished (empty plate no. 21?!). 

After that, I brushed my teeth, packed my seven things—including the bottles filled with hot water—and headed back to my tent. Since the Wi-Fi was still working great, I was able to call and wish my sister a happy birthday and chat with Seraina a bit too. But by 9 p.m., it was lights out—I didn’t want to be late for breakfast again. My final ritual before sleeping: put in my earplugs, slip on the eye mask, take off my down jacket and the layer underneath, and snuggle into the sleeping bag. 






Monday, April 28 – EBC

 According to the plan, today should be my last rest day before the rotation. I’m curious to see if everything will go according to plan. During the night, we got 10 cm of fresh snow, but it stayed fairly calm with little wind. I woke up right on time and heard the snow sliding off the tent roofs at irregular intervals. It took a few of these mini roof avalanches before I realized they weren’t real avalanches. As usual, I woke up too early and took advantage of the Wi-Fi. 

After that, I followed my evening routine—just in reverse: take off the thermals in the sleeping bag and put on my pants, then put on the sweater and down jacket, slip out of the sleeping bag, brush my hair, put on my hat and sunglasses, and head outside. On the way to the dining tent, I pass the pee tent, which of course I don't skip, and soon I’m sitting in the dining tent. That’s where I still am now—laptop plugged in, ready to send the blog to my sister. I also used the time to transfer the photos from my phone to the laptop, so at least the first batch is safely backed up. 

I assume Chirring and Gyalzen will show up sometime in the afternoon so we can pack everything we need for the rotation together. In the meantime, I’ve already prepared a small pharmacy bag and thought about what clothes I’ll need. 




Monday, April 28 – EBC - Part II

 I’m now back from my rotation and I don’t want to miss the opportunity to take you along with me for those three intense days. But first, let me tell you about the afternoon of last Monday. 

As expected, around 3 p.m., Chirring and Gyalzen showed up at my tent so we could go through what would be coming up the mountain with us and what wouldn’t. I had already done a pre-selection to keep things from taking too long. My previous expeditions definitely came in handy here, as I already knew about 99% of what I needed to pack. I was unsure about the extra clothing, since it gets even colder in the higher camps. Up there, you’re even less motivated to change clothes than you are here at EBC. Still, it can get very hot in the Western Cwm, and in that case you at least want to be able to take off sweaty clothes to let them dry. I also packed a big bag full of potential snacks, in case I didn’t like the food in the camps. I already don’t eat much at home, let alone on the mountain. But if you’re sitting in a tent all day because it’s too cold to go outside, a few snacks can be a welcome distraction from the boredom. 

The essentials included things like my air mattress, sleeping bag, and down suit—plus, for me, several pairs of socks, depending on whether we’d be in cold or hot weather while wearing the triple boots. I also packed my e-book reader, the Theos, and SPF 100 sunscreen. Once we had agreed on everything, Chirring and Gyalzen packed up what was already ready and put it in their backpacks. I went to the coffee tent one last time for a hot chocolate, but unfortunately didn’t run into anyone I knew. It seemed like everyone was already up on the mountain. The hot chocolate was still delicious, and the calm before the storm did me some good. I don’t remember what we had for dinner, but in any case, I tried—as always—to eat at least half of it. After that, I stayed in the dining tent until my phone was fully charged, and then I went to bed. Wake-up was at 1 a.m. for me—we wanted to head out at 2 a.m. the next day, and before that I needed to eat something to keep everyone happy. 

 Tuesday, April 29 – EBC to Camp 1 

I didn’t have much trouble falling asleep after dinner. Everything was ready, and I was so ready to finally move up to the higher camps. So, after the alarm went off, I got dressed, turned on my headlamp, and went to the dining tent, where, according to the plan, 3 liters of tea would be waiting for me. 

When I opened the zipper, I couldn’t quite believe what I was seeing: contrary to all the weather forecasts I had checked, there was 7 cm of fresh snow outside the tent. It was also windier than I had expected. My mind couldn’t quite process it, and as I peed, I wondered whether the snow would be a problem. The attempt to spot other headlamps in the Icefall was unsuccessful. 

In the dining tent, the promised thermoses were there, so I treated myself to a cup of black tea with cornflakes. I didn’t feel like having more at the moment. When a kitchen Sherpa came in, he asked me if I was going up today. As if I’d just casually be sitting in the dining tent at 1:20 a.m. eating cornflakes for fun. He said his brother was also going up today and that it would be dangerous. I only half-listened because I had good Wi-Fi and wanted to update my WhatsApp status. I forgot it was still evening back home, so I quickly answered a few messages. Chirring and Gyalzen soon appeared as well and also had some tea. 

I went back to the tent to put on my boots and grab my packed backpack. Lastly, I filled my two water bottles with hot water and added a bit of flavor. At 2:20 a.m., we were ready to set off—which here means first circling the Puja shrine once more to ask for a safe passage. 

In the snowfall, we made our way toward the glacier and from there to the Crampon Point. This time it took five minutes longer—we had a long way ahead of us and didn’t need to rush. In the distant Icefall, I could at least now see a few headlamps, which reassured me that we weren’t the only ones out despite the fresh snow and ongoing snowfall. 

At Crampon Point, we had one last pee break, and just as we were putting on our crampons, five Sherpas appeared from the Icefall. They were on their way back to Base Camp, and I didn’t find out what their five-minute discussion with Chirring and Gyalzen was about. Honestly, I didn’t want to ask too much—like whether it was a dumb idea to be heading up now. I simply thought: they’ve just come down through the entire Icefall, and going down in snow is usually harder than going up. So it should be fine for us to climb today. 

And so we began our way along the now familiar route. The ropes were clearly visible, and the sections where we’d had to walk on bare rock last time were now much easier to traverse on snow. I kept glancing back to see if anyone was following us, but I never saw any other headlamps. 

Chirring led us stoically from anchor to anchor, while swirling snow still whipped around our faces. I wasn’t sure if my chin was frozen—I kept having to pull down my buff for a few seconds to breathe properly, and it was damp from my breath. For a while, I fixated on the question: can a chin actually freeze? I couldn’t really come up with an answer. 

The beam of my headlamp, though, stayed focused on the path, which remained clearly visible the whole time. At first, we passed 2–3 Sherpas coming down, who didn’t say much and descended purposefully. 

After just under 3 hours, we reached the spot where we had turned back last time. Now, a new rope clearly pointed into the unknown. I told Chirring and Gyalzen that we could turn back if it seemed too dangerous. After all, I still didn’t see a single other headlamp either above or below us—we were completely alone in an Icefall that, in theory, should have been teeming with people. The two just gave a brief “no” and asked if my fingers were still warm enough. 

 

Every half hour, we took a short break to drink, or if I needed to change my gloves, we’d stop briefly as well. But since it was windy—and quickly got cold—we tried to keep moving as steadily as possible. I tackled the uphill sections slowly but steadily. On flat stretches or descents, I moved at a reasonably normal pace. 

I noticed the towering seracs beside me but didn’t give them too much attention. They’re there whether you like it or not, and you can’t really tell by looking at them whether they’re dangerous or not. In any case, they were beautiful. Every time I wanted to take a photo, I asked the two guys if it was okay, and most of the time they nodded—they knew it would only take a moment before I was ready to continue. 

The route mostly led uphill, sometimes down again, across snow bridges and crevasses. Occasionally, there was a ladder, but often the only option was to jump over the crevasse. Still, I never felt total panic. The big jumps did take courage, but the higher I climbed, the less I was willing to let a glacier crevasse dictate when I should stop. One huge jump I only dared to make after Chirring counted me down—and even then, only because he said I’d probably slide forward on my stomach (which, thankfully, didn’t happen). 

The long ladder I had seen on social media, stretching horizontally across a crevasse, was gone—it was now leaned steeply against a wall, so you could simply climb it like at home. That’s much easier for me than the horizontal ones where you also have to look down—right into the crevasse—to figure out where to place your boots. 

There were also spots where you stood on a ridge, saw the ropes to the left that you were supposed to climb, but the fixed ropes led off to the right. These little detours that add more vertical meters are always a mental challenge. Still, the longer you’re on the move, the more you notice how you’re climbing higher and higher through the Icefall. 

From Base Camp, the route looks like a giant question mark. You start off to the right, then curve left around a rock formation, and ascend again on the right side. From there, it zigzags toward the left, and you exit the actual Icefall roughly in the upper third. At that point, all that stands between you and Camp 1 are countless glacier crevasses—some to be jumped over, others crossed like sand dunes: up and down, up and down. 

I only realized this when I was standing on one of these “sand dunes” and spotted a lone tent behind a ridge. I thought, “That must be Camp 1,” and sure enough, ten minutes later we arrived at the tent. The camp itself was visible just ahead, seemingly only five minutes away. But in between were six steep dunes—each one only becoming visible once you’d climbed the previous (and supposedly final) one. 

It took a full 35 minutes before we finally stood in the camp. I know the Icefall dictates the route, but honestly, no one needs six of these “little bastard hills” after already spending six hours in the Icefall. 

 

Well then, we reached Camp 1 after 6.5 hours, and the first thing I did was head into the small dining tent, where hot tea was being served. I drank a cup and chatted with my friends whom I had been missing back at Base Camp. By the way, the tent was very similar to Camp 1 at Manaslu: in the middle, a table had been carved out of snow and ice, and around it, a seating platform also made of snow and ice. 

The others had all come up the day before, and aside from Bianca and Paul, everyone was getting ready to move on, since they were heading to Camp 2 that day. Bianca had had to empty her stomach shortly before starting out yesterday, and apparently Paul caught the bug either on the way through the Icefall or once in Camp 1. He slowed down more and more throughout the Icefall, and in the end it took them almost 10 hours to reach Camp 1. He spent most of his time lying in the tent. Bianca, on the other hand, was a bit bored, since Camp 1 is really used mainly as a stopover, and no one stays there longer than one night unless forced to by health issues. 

We used the time to keep each other entertained and watched the others pack their gear and slowly head off toward Camp 2. From the dining tent, you could see the first part of the route quite well, and it looked relatively flat and pleasant. Also, it’s only a 400-meter climb to Camp 2, crossing directly through the Western Cwm. 

After a while, I went looking for my backpack and asked Gyalzen. He and Chirring had meanwhile shoveled out a large platform with other Sherpas and pitched tents on it. They had already prepared one of those tents for me—meaning they had inflated my air mattress, laid out my sleeping bag, and placed my clothes bag and down suit ready for use. My backpack was already inside the tent too, so all I had to do was flop down inside. I hadn’t expected that kind of service and am really grateful to both of them for this “princess service.” 

So I lay down in my tent, changed clothes, and before long it got quite hot inside. The sun was shining, and the platform had been strategically placed in a relatively wind-sheltered spot. So there I was, barefoot and just wearing thermals and a T-shirt in my tent, trying to eat snacks regularly and empty my water bottles. Meanwhile, Chirring and Gyalzen started digging a new toilet that would be a bit better hidden than the one we’d had so far. 

 

From the dining tent, you had a clear view of everything—nothing could be hidden, no matter how hard you tried. You did have to accept a bit of an elevation gain to get to the new toilet, but the risk of being seen—or having your bare backside spotted—was a hundred times lower. 

In the afternoon, I also practiced my summit puzzle a few times while wearing gloves, only to find out how difficult it actually is. And I wasn’t even using the thick gloves, just my very thin ones. We’ll see if this whole puzzling-on-the-summit-of-Everest idea works out. At the moment, it doesn’t seem all that feasible to me. 

For dinner, I was served a large portion of plain white rice, and I tried to eat as much of it as I could with the help of Aromat seasoning. The problem is that by the time the rice reaches me, it’s usually already quite cold, mushy, and flavorless. The Aromat helps only a little to make it somewhat edible. Luckily, I’d already eaten enough nuts, so—even though I felt a bit guilty—I could leave half of it uneaten without worry. 

Once the sun disappeared behind the mountains, it got very cold very quickly, and I put on every piece of useful clothing I had. I only left the tent to pee, and during those moments I enjoyed the view of the Western Cwm and the surrounding mountains for a few minutes. I read until it got dark and then tried to sleep. Unfortunately, I had only put on thin socks for sleeping, so I got pretty cold during the night. I woke up often, and every time I changed positions, my sleeping bag would slip off the air mattress. It took quite a bit of effort each time to find a decent and somewhat warm sleeping position again. Plus, the night feels endlessly long when you’ve already been lying in your sleeping bag since 5 p.m. 😉 

Wednesday, April 30th – Camp 1 to Camp 2 

I didn’t exactly wake up exhausted on Wednesday, but I certainly didn’t feel as great as I usually do in Basecamp. The hot Nalgene bottles had already cooled down to body temperature, and no matter how I turned, the sleeping bag was cold somewhere. I distracted myself by fiddling around on my phone. Unfortunately, my bladder also forced me out of the tent, and since we wanted to leave fairly early anyway, I didn’t torture myself too much. I slipped into my clothes inside the sleeping bag and got up. Since I still had to pack everything inside the tent, I just slipped into the outer shoes of my boots and went to pee. It gets light here very early, even though the sun hides behind the mountains, which helps you wake up early. After peeing, I packed everything that belonged in my backpack, put the sleeping bag into its stuff sack, and folded the air mattress so it would fit into its sack. Everything that Chirring and Gyalzen had already carried to Camp 1, I laid out in the tent, and the rest was already packed in my backpack. Finally, I put on my boots, this time with the inner shoes already snugly laced up for the way to Camp 2. Afterward, I took my backpack outside and went to the dining tent. Bianca and Paul were already sitting there, and they would also be heading to Camp 2 today. I got a bowl of a few cornflakes and drank half a liter of black tea. Chirring and Gyalzen still had to eat breakfast and pack their backpacks, so I didn’t need to rush. Bianca and Paul, meanwhile, had already finished their breakfast and were in the process of putting on their climbing harnesses and crampons. Everything here takes a little more time, and since you know that, you’re usually already putting on these important tools before the planned departure time. The goal for Bianca’s group and for us was to cover as much of the route as possible before the sun would shine into the Cwm. It’s known that the Cwm turns into an oven within minutes, and you get roasted like a chicken while making your way to Camp 2. In such situations, I feel drained and lose all my energy, another reason for me to wear fewer warm clothes today, so I wouldn’t sweat too much. As a result, I froze a little while sitting on the snow in the dining tent, shoveling my few spoonfuls of cornflakes into me. 

Bianca and Paul left the camp about half to three-quarters of an hour before me, and while I was waiting, I just continued drinking black tea. The more I drank now, the better I would handle the altitude change. When my guys were ready, we could finally get going, and a glance at the clock told me it was only 8 a.m. The path gradually climbs to the right, passing Camp 1 and heading toward the end of the valley. Often, there is no rope to guide you, especially if there’s too much snow. However, flags from the fixing team guide the way through the Cwm. It first winds along the right side of the mountain and then slowly changes sides, because Camp 2 is located on the left side of the mountain, or more precisely, directly below the summit of Everest on the left side. Although you’re walking on the glacier the whole way, you encounter very few crevasses. You simply cross 2-3 smaller ones, and the 2-3 large ones are secured with fixed ropes and cross wider snow bridges. After about 50 minutes, we suddenly find ourselves in front of a 10-meter vertical wall. I’ve seen such scenes in various videos, but it was still a bit unexpected. The passage over this serac was secured with various ropes, so you didn’t have to wait too long. The Sherpas with large, heavy backpacks attached them to the ropes and scrambled up without their backpacks, while other Sherpas helped to pull the load up from above. I noticed Paul in the upper third of the vertical section, while Bianca was just getting ready to move upwards. I thought it would make a great video and wanted to take out my phone, which I had just used for a photo. But Bianca was so fast that I didn’t even have a second to film. I have no idea how out of breath she was at the top because moving quickly at this altitude is almost impossible for regular people like us, and she was really, really fast at getting to the top. I took a little more time for myself. When I face vertical sections, I always try to clip in quickly and then climb at a steady pace. In the middle, I usually take a short break to catch my breath, and then continue for the second half. I always try to ignore the fact that people may be waiting for me down below, because rushing really doesn’t help. It would just make me more out of breath and I would need an even longer break on the wall. When I finally reach the top, I’m so out of breath that I’m always relieved when Chirring takes the Jumar off me. 

I had always clipped the safety line myself until now, even though it seemed almost impossible to do so in those few seconds. Above the vertical section, there was a large area where everyone could stop to catch their breath. I was glad when Gyalzen said we would take a short break here. It also seemed that the area at Crampon Point was designated for the Sherpas. Above that area, I saw almost no more porters with crampons, and everywhere on the plateau, there were piles of climbing harnesses and crampons scattered around. After our break, we continued along the route, and shortly afterward, we overtook Bianca and Paul, who was still not fully recovered. He needed quite a few breaks, and his pace was very slow. We were also incredibly lucky with the weather. By now, more than an hour had passed, and the Western Cwm was overcast, so the sun couldn’t roast us. It was the perfect temperature to walk without a down jacket, but not too hot to start sweating. Still, the clouds were high enough that we could enjoy a little view of the mountains. We could also see the tents of Camp 2 in the distance from time to time, and they didn’t seem very far away. The path now led diagonally toward the left side of the Cwm, and it was sometimes almost flat and sometimes a little steeper. Paul said he could remember from his last ascent that there was a very long hill leading directly to Camp 2. For me, it did feel like a long hill, but it wasn’t as steep as I had expected. After about 2.5 hours, we reached the lower end of Camp 2. As always on Everest, 14peaks had set up the highest and almost last camp. This meant I still had to walk another 40 minutes before reaching our camp. But first, we made one last stop, where we also took off our crampons, as the path led over stones, and it was easier to manage without crampons. I actually thought I could make the way in 30 minutes, but it was steeper than it had seemed from below, and our camp was not even visible from the bottom. I thought we would be sharing a camp with Seven Summit Treks, like we did at Camp 1, so I aimed for their dining tent. However, Chirring kept telling me several times to just keep going, and eventually, I got a little frustrated because I couldn’t find the damn tent. I took the last 10 minutes in intervals, stopping a hundred times to search for the tent, which of course took more time. When I finally spotted it in my field of vision, it was only a few minutes away, and I was relieved that we had arrived. Although it was the shortest day of the rotation, as we arrived exactly after 3 hours, I still felt almost as tired as the day before when we were on the move for 6.5 hours. The last hill was just too long for my brain 😊 It seems like both the first day with the 6 waves and the second day with the final hill each end with a "pain-in-the-ass part." 

Since it was just before 11:30 AM, Chirring and Gyalzen sent me back to the dining tent, where I drank more black tea and had a bar. They took care of my tent again, and an hour later, the "princess service" was ready for me once more. I continued drinking my black tea outside and thought that I might quickly go down to the Seven Summit Treks Camp to chat with Bianca and Paul. That's when I saw Mitch with his Sherpa Gjelze and Kristin, who were just meeting, so I walked over to them. Kristin was on her way to the Lhotse Face to explore how much snow had accumulated there. Mitch and Gjelze were coming back from their acclimatization there and were heading down. Mitch had been struggling with hoarseness for several weeks, and now his voice was almost gone, and his throat was sore. They had decided that they would take the whole journey back to base camp today to give Mitch the recovery he deserved. They might even continue descending to speed up his recovery. Kristin asked me if I wanted to join them, but since I had just arrived an hour ago, I had to unfortunately decline. Let's see if I ever get the chance to hike a mountain with Kristin in my life… I said goodbye to the three of them and walked back to my camp. There, I asked Chirring if it was okay for me to quickly stop by Bianca and Paul to check if they were doing okay. They allowed me 30 minutes since lunch was about to be served. I walked the 2 minutes down that had taken me almost 10 minutes just 2 hours ago and arrived just in time to hug Bianca as she arrived. Paul followed a few meters behind her, looking even more tired than he had when I passed them on the glacier. Since they were both relieved to have arrived and I knew from experience that one isn’t very chatty in that moment, I left them to settle in and returned to my camp. I set myself up in my tent and stayed there for a few hours. I tried to nap a little, played on my phone, and continued reading my book, as it was still cloudy outside, and it had started snowing again. At 4:30 PM, the weather outside looked much friendlier, and since I had to use the bathroom again anyway, I took it as an opportunity to crawl out of my sleeping bag and put on my down pants. In the sun, it was so pleasantly warm, and the view in front of me was so much better than just a few hours earlier. 

When the kitchen crew spotted me outside, they asked if I wanted some soup before dinner. I declined but asked if they could perhaps make a little popcorn for me. It didn’t take half an hour, and soon I had a basket of warm popcorn in my hands. Sitting outside in front of the Lhotse Face on a folding chair, munching on the popcorn, made up for all the years I had waited for this view. I think I sat there for over an hour, simply gazing at this magnificent ice wall, which I hope to eventually climb. The weather was good to us—the sun shone on the wall in all its glory. To my left stands Mount Everest, another steep rock face that I could also only admire. I had waited so long to see this mountain, and now I’m sitting right in front of it, unable to get enough of it. I have no idea what the kitchen crew thought when they saw me sitting there, much like in a movie theater when you’re watching a film and eating popcorn. Except my "movie" was a sheer rock wall and the icy Lhotse Face, and yet I am indescribably happy about it. 

I don’t know how you all feel reading this, but this sight is still beyond my comprehension (and this is four days later). I was actually sitting right in front of Everest. Right in front of it, literally and truly. In a straight line, the summit is probably still vertically 2.5 kilometers away from me. What a difference from the more than 6000 kilometers and 28 years I’ve waited to be this close to my mountain of destiny. Far away now is the frustration of the last hill to get to the end of Camp 2, which I was still carrying with me this morning. 

 

I stayed outside until the sun lost its strength behind the advancing veil of clouds, and I started to feel a little cold. I told the kitchen crew that I wouldn’t need dinner anymore, apart from the popcorn. They looked a bit disappointed because they had already cooked something for the three Chinese guys in the dining tent. But when I had to go inside briefly to get toilet paper, the smell almost made me nauseous, and I was very glad to get back outside quickly. After peeing, my tent was the best place to wait out the night. I learned from the first night in the Cwm and put on my warm socks for the night. I also asked Chirring to fill my warming bottles only after their dinner, so I might have some warmth to last longer through the night. Since the three of us felt great, we decided before heading to our tents that we would cancel the rest day for tomorrow and make an attempt to reach Camp 3. We planned to have breakfast at 7 a.m. and leave at 8 a.m. 

Thursday, May 1 – Camp 2 – Touch Camp 3 

My alarm went off at 6:45 am, since this time I didn’t have to pack up my tent again. I had already packed the important things the evening before, so in the morning I didn’t have to make too many unnecessary movements in the cold. After peeing, I took my backpack out of the tent into the dining tent and first put on my thick boots. Then I went into the kitchen tent, where I was warmly welcomed and immediately handed a cup of tea. The crew also wanted to know if I wanted noodle soup for breakfast. Just the thought of it made it hard for me to continue drinking my tea. However, since I couldn’t leave the tent without eating, busy hands stretched a package of cookies toward my face. I saw the packaging and knew they were chocolate cookies, so I bravely took one. In the morning, eating is always especially difficult for me because I usually don’t eat at home until around noon. That means the challenge is greatest in the morning. The chocolate cookies were a good thing, and I managed to eat 5 of them over the next half hour, along with about 4 cups of tea. Meanwhile, Chirring and Gyalzen also showed up, but both complained of headaches. Since we weren’t in a hurry, I told them that, despite the different plan, we could take a rest day today. They had carried 25 kg each around for the past two days, so it was almost obvious to me that their bodies would welcome a break. But they said they were fine and just needed breakfast. I suggested that we would decide after breakfast whether we would rest or ascend to Camp 3. 

Now, I was able to witness firsthand in the kitchen tent the hustle and bustle as numerous people tried to melt useful water and get the stove running better. It seemed that one of the Nepali was responsible for cooking breakfast, but many hands also contributed. After about 20 minutes, noodles and soups were ladled into bowls and distributed to all the other Nepali. They slurped the contents of their bowls in seconds and went outside to clean them by hand. Once again, Chirring and Gyalzen refused the rest day, and we met outside to attach our crampons for our adventure. By now, two people were already on the route toward Camp 3, luckily breaking trail through the snow that had fallen during the night. At the beginning, there was still no rope set up, so we had to navigate using the flags. The trail initially wound quite flatly or with very little incline along the crevasses towards the Lhotse Face. We approached the two trailbreakers slowly but steadily, and the closer we got, the slower they seemed. When we were already in sight, I discovered that it was a Sherpa with his client on the short rope. 

The short rope is actually not necessary here, unless the guide wants the client to keep up with the pace to some extent. Behind us were about 10 other people, likely with the same plan as ours. After 1.5 hours, we had caught up with the two people ahead of us, and all that lay ahead was a new snowfield, partially interrupted by flags. I hesitated to let Chirring go into the fresh snow, as I knew we were still on a glacier and at any moment there could be a crevasse lurking somewhere. However, we had no other choice but to take the lead. Gyalzen reassured me that it would be fine, and I just had to trust that the fixing team had marked any crevasses along the route. So, I followed Chirring at a 5-meter distance, making my way up the increasingly steep hill towards the bergschrund. It took about half an hour before we reached the end of the hill, where a beautiful traverse appeared before us, secured by orange ropes in a glacier crevasse. First, you have to jumare up about 5 meters, then traverse another 5 meters, during which your feet have no real hold. That is, under all the snow, there is no clear place to place your feet, or at least a few spikes of your crampons. After that, you need to jumare up another 7 meters before you reach the base of the Lhotse Face. This spot will definitely be interesting when the mountain fills up, and even people with a bit less experience with the equipment will have to get through here. I already dread what kind of conflicts could arise if someone gets stuck, because the traverse is not easy, and below you, there is a wonderfully deep glacier crevasse. I had to control myself quite a bit, stopping 2-3 times to catch my breath before I could continue. But I did so with the full awareness that no one was waiting behind me. I have no idea how I will react if people are waiting behind me and others above me also want to descend. Then you’re stuck in the middle of the traverse, panicking, and can’t move anymore… We’ll see... 

But back to the present. Now I am at the foot of the Lhotse Face, and all I see are parts of orange ropes in the middle of an endless wall. Since we are the first ones, and there was some fresh snow in the past two days, the ropes were partially covered in snow. Additionally, the underlying ground was hidden under the deep snow, so you never knew if the next step would hold, if you would slip a bit, or if there was an ice plate beneath. Chirring, as usual, went ahead and stopped every 10 steps to give me time to follow him. Unfortunately, the steps he made were a bit too big for me. At times, I was reminded of Ama Dablam, but I never once thought about turning back. 

 

I absolutely wanted to get over 7000m today. Partly because I had never been above that limit without oxygen, and partly because I wanted to prove to Everest that I was taking my rotation seriously. And for me, Camp 3 was just part of that. The individual steps were exhausting, and the many breaks somehow also felt tiresome. Still, I was always glad when I could catch my breath for a minute. I looked up too often to see how much further it was, and even though I noticed the slow progress, I wondered how it would be during the summit rotation. On that rotation, I would have to ascend from Camp 2 to Camp 3 in one day, and then continue to Camp 4 the next. And that, even though Camp 3 isn't halfway up the Lhotse Face, meaning the second day would involve even more uphill climbing. But I tried to push those thoughts away and focus on the fact that I was on the Lhotse Face, just a heartbeat away from the summit, compared to where I had come from. I think if I had told the guys that I wanted to turn back, they would have let me, so it was in my hands how high I wanted to go. Somehow, the higher we got, the less I wanted to turn back, because then all the effort would have been almost in vain. Maybe that's what kept me going, and just below Camp 3, about 30 minutes below it, there was a small traverse where it wasn't just steeply uphill. From there on, it was 100% clear that we were going all the way to Camp 3, and I was relieved when we finally reached the spot where 14peaks had set up camp. Just above, there were the six tents that had been set up, but we didn't go those last 15 meters. A glance at the watch showed me that it had taken me 2 hours since the narrow spot at the foot of the Lhotse Face. So, we had been on the way for exactly 4 hours to reach Camp 3. Phunuru and Allan had predicted almost 4 weeks ago that I would be fit enough to make it to Camp 3 in four hours. The fact that it took me exactly that long, even though I felt so slow, really surprised me. I also didn't feel as tired as I had expected after the 2 hours in the fresh snow. Since the two guys were still suffering from headaches, we only had a quick drink and then prepared for the descent. In the meantime, the weather had turned and fresh snow started to fall. So, we put on an extra layer, and I had them explain to me again how to best handle the rappel device, so it wouldn’t accidentally fall off my harness. I had only used it once a few years ago, as I usually prefer the ATC. But since some ropes here are either too frozen or too thick for the ATC, we decided to use the rappel device on the mountain. I gladly accepted the tips from the two of them and began the first rappel. Ironically, it only took us about 30 minutes to descend to the foot of the face. The painstakingly gained altitude seemed to rush by, and since there weren't many anchors, we didn't have to unclip that often. Unfortunately, my harness was tightening around my stomach a bit, so I had to take a short break while rappelling. It felt as though I was about to vomit. But after a brief relief, I was fine again for a few minutes. On the way down, we crossed paths with a guide with Westerlin, who was using oxygen, and three Sherpas with large backpacks. 

 

When we arrived back at the traverse that had scared me during the ascent, I realized that you can't tell from above whether someone is stuck in the traverse or not. Calling out doesn't really work either, as the echo doesn't carry around the corner. So, you have to pull on the rope and hope that the traverse is clear before you clip in. Honestly, I'm not sure if there are many opportunities to re-anchor if you're rappelling down while someone else is ascending. I definitely don't look forward to passing this spot a second and third time. I just hope that there will be few people on the mountain and that we'll have some luck when descending from my two summits at this point. Once again, I took a deep breath and made it through the traverse, feeling relieved when we were finally past it. Below that spot, we met Kristin, who—once again alone—was on her way for a night in Camp 3. She asked us a bit about the condition of the face and whether anyone above her was still on the route. She knew that the three Sherpas were climbing with the goal of setting up a few tents and then returning to Camp 2. So, she would be spending the night up there all alone. I took the opportunity and finally asked her for a photo, as I want to remember for the next 10 years that I was at my dream mountain at the same time as a legend. She agreed, and I even offered her one of the Theos to keep her company in Camp 3, but she politely declined and instead took some mental unicorn power with her. We continued the rest of the way to Camp 2 and, just one hour after leaving Camp 3, we were back in our camp. The snowstorm had gotten a little stronger, so I immediately retreated to my tent. Chirring knew exactly what I needed, and 10 minutes later I was already stocked with black tea and popcorn. Once again, the weather behaved similarly to yesterday, and the later the day got, the more the sun appeared at the end of the Western Cwm. I couldn't resist sitting outside on the folding chair again today, just looking at the Lhotse Face. I know that after this expedition I’ll never come back here, and I want to soak up this entire environment so much that it almost hurts. 

The view is breathtaking, the upper part of Lhotse covered in snow. The rock face to my left is now mostly covered in snow as well, but you can still see the different rock layers beneath, flashing through. I’ve read about the geological structure of Everest a few times, but I still can’t remember it. I only know that the yellow band is named after the color of the rock, and that this band runs through the whole mountain and is visible from here as well. Of all the views of Everest, this one is my favorite so far, although I’m pretty sure I can’t see the summit from here. It looks somehow different, yet very similar to how it looks from the Khumbu Valley. Since it was getting cold outside and the sun was about to disappear behind the clouds again, I wanted to go back to my tent. However, Chirring suggested that I come to the kitchen tent instead, since it would be warmer there, and I hadn’t eaten anything yet. So, at 6 p.m., I ended up in the bustling kitchen tent. The Nepali didn’t quite understand why I was sitting there, even though it was a dining tent for us Westerners. But there were three Russian women sitting there, who were coughing a little—double the reason not to sit in there. I enjoyed the hour in the kitchen tent, as the view offered there is something not everyone gets to experience. The kitchen can be described, in the best way, as rudimentary. There are three gas canisters in the middle of the room, each with a large bowl of ice and/or water sitting on top. Then, as a room divider, there is a small table made from ice, with flat stones placed on it. This is where the head cook prepares the meals, but there are also various bowls with spices, etc. Next to it, a part is covered with a wooden board, on which thermoses are placed, filled with either milk tea, black tea, or hot water. The Sherpas are allowed to help themselves, and my cup was also refilled regularly. Since the kitchen crew kept trying to convince me to eat the Dal Baht that was cooked for the Nepali, but I wasn’t hungry at all, I eventually decided to ask for a bowl of cornflakes. They wouldn’t let me leave the tent without eating something, and even though the food smelled very good, I couldn’t bring myself to eat any of it. Even the few spoonfuls of cornflakes took a lot of effort and time. At around 7 p.m., I had my bottles filled with hot water, went to the bathroom again, and then snuggled into my sleeping bag for the last night in camp. I had arranged with the guys that we would leave at 5:30 a.m. the next morning to head straight back to Basecamp. So the night would be rather short, but that was perfectly fine with me. 

Friday, May 2 – Camp 2 to Base Camp 

I couldn’t sleep as well this night as I had in Base Camp, but I think I managed to get a few hours of sleep. Since I had to pack up everything in my tent again, I let myself be woken up by my alarm at 4:45 am. The first thing I did was go to the bathroom, and I took my backpack with me to the dining tent, where I had already packed everything possible. On the way, I ran into Kristin again. She hadn’t slept much during the night, but she felt good. Since she also planned to go to Base Camp today, she had left early from 7000m and had already been on her way for an hour. After a short chat, I went back to the tent to pack up my sleeping bag and air mattress into their travel size. I also left my large snack bag there. These three things would stay at Camp 2 because, during our summit rotation, we would go directly from EBC to Camp 2, and I wouldn’t need them in EBC. 

In the meantime, Chirring had shown up and invited me into the kitchen tent again. There were thermoses with hot beverages ready, and once again, I woke up with black tea. With even less hunger than yesterday, I managed to eat only 2 cookies this time, but I drank 2-3 cups of tea. Honestly, I don’t know if Chirring and Gyalzen ate anything for breakfast; there was nothing prepared for them, but I saw Chirring nibbling on a chocolate cookie while I put on my climbing harness. This time, Gyalzen was responsible for packing up and securing my sleeping bag and other things. 

I assume he put everything into a rice sack labeled for us and placed it next to the oxygen bottles that had already been carried up for me, beside the dining tent. We didn't put on our crampons yet, because we wanted to walk down the first steep hill to the lower Camp 2 without them. Right on time at 5:30 am, we set off. We set quite a fast pace, but after just a few minutes, we were overtaken by a few Sherpas who seemed to be sprinting down the hill. However, I wanted to be careful with my steps, as an injury at this point would be even more unfortunate than in the last few months. Once we reached the lower end of the camp, the rocks were no longer in the way, and we were able to continue at a similar pace to the Sherpas in front of us. Finally, I was back in my hiking rhythm, and it felt amazing to feel that way without being too out of breath. The atmosphere in the Western Cwm was also unique. We crossed only Sherpas, the air was crystal clear, and the sky was that typical Nepalese blue. The view of Pumori and the others was spectacular, and the valley seemed to radiate a stillness that I hadn’t noticed on the way up two days ago. I had to stop several times to capture the scene with my iPhone, but I doubt I could really preserve the atmosphere that way. I definitely enjoyed every single second we spent in this small high plateau. Almost 30 minutes after setting off, we stood on the platform above the vertical crevasse, and we put on our crampons. The vertical section wasn’t very crowded, so we were able to rappel down and continue on our way in peace. Another 25 minutes later, we had already arrived at Camp 1. Gyalzen asked me if I needed a break, but I felt good and was slowly craving Base Camp again, so I was fine with continuing. We let a group of Sherpas, who were also accompanied by Kristin, go ahead. They set a brutal pace, and since I remembered the wonderfully steep 6 waves waiting for us at the beginning, we were happy to let them pass. I took the waves very slowly because, even though I had spent a few minutes at 7000m, we were still at 6066m, and breathing up here is just harder. After the waves, I was able to enjoy the path much more. At first, we crossed only a few Sherpas, and after about 100 meters of ascent, we encountered our first little delay. I knew that I probably wouldn’t have the luck to have a completely empty Icefall in front of me again, but seeing about 25-30 people was still somehow unexpected. The spot was just a short ladder that needed to be crossed, a typical one-way section. Fortunately, there was a nice Sherpa below the ladder who recognized Chirring, and he let us go ahead. Probably, Chirring had told him while waiting that I wasn’t too clumsy and that the wait would be short. In any case, we were already on the ladder after maybe 6 minutes of waiting, and then passed all the waiting people to continue our descent. The overtaking was smooth because it was a wide section. Just a few minutes later, it wouldn’t have been that easy anymore.
 We encountered another small group at the first technical spot below the ladder. We let two Sherpas pass, then rappelled into a crevasse and climbed up the other side. When we were at the bottom of the crevasse, a few Indian Army personnel were already rappelling at our climbing spot, so we had to wait briefly there as well. Since new Indians were already ready at the top to rappel down, we didn’t waste time and climbed ahead of them. I didn’t want to make them wait too long, so I picked up the pace, but of course, I regretted it halfway through; however, I couldn’t stop at that point. Once we reached the top, I took a 5-minute breather. 

These two short delays were, however, the only events on the way back that showed that some people still want to climb Everest this year. We continued to cross paths with individuals, but always at well-visible and safe spots, allowing us to descend at our own pace. After 2.5 hours, we reached the Crampon Point again. The last 20 minutes were really warm, and I had to take off layers twice to avoid sweating. We had made it out of the Icefall before the sun hit it, which is a major safety factor and also made me a bit proud, as we were almost down in Sherpa time. We took off our crampons and continued toward Base Camp. The sun was already shining strongly here, so I quickly started to feel hot. Since we were so close to the goal, I didn’t want to change again, and I couldn’t get my hot feet out of the boots until we reached the tent. So, I endured the last 15 minutes, trying desperately not to think about the fact that next time I would walk through here in the opposite direction, hopefully with 2 summits in hand, satisfied but very tired. Almost unbelievable for me, but still a goal that is irresistibly approaching. I took the last steep meters into camp very slowly, and at the entrance, I thanked Chirring and Gyalzen. I then continued to the Puja shrine to thank for the successful rotation and then made my way to the tent. On the way, I ran into Jo, who asked me a bit about the mountain. She couldn’t wait to finally go through the Icefall, and it was planned for her to depart that night. I went back to my tent and could finally, finally take off the shoes in which my feet had been cooking. After that, I changed, sat down on my bed in the tent, and delivered the good news to my family that I was safely back. I enjoyed the quiet of the hour and spent the entire morning in my tent. I read the news, answered text messages, ate some snacks, or just sat there, happy with how well everything had been going in the last few days. At 12:30, I went to the kitchen tent to inform the crew that I was back. I also wanted to ask if they could make fries with fried eggs for me. Then I sat in the dining tent and drank tea until the food came. Unfortunately, they hadn’t quite understood me, so the requested meal didn’t arrive. Since I now really had to eat as much as I could, I asked again for fries with fried eggs, which I then got with a little delay. In the afternoon, I mostly sat in the dining tent to answer the many messages and go through my photos. I actually wanted to shower as well, but since the weather changed in the afternoon, I decided to skip it. For dinner, I wanted the same again, but once again, it didn’t work out. I did get fried eggs, but with spaghetti and two fried potatoes. Luckily, I was able to pass on the spaghetti, and after eating, I clarified with the kitchen crew that, from now on, I would like fries with fried eggs. After dinner, I read a little in my book, then went to bed soon because the last few nights had really worn me out. 

Saturday, May 3 – EBC 

I had a wonderful sleep that night and woke up at 6 am as usual in Base Camp. I then enjoyed the warmth of my sleeping bag and played around a bit on my phone. By 8 am, I was already in the dining tent, where I learned that others had pushed breakfast time back by half an hour. It would have been nice to know that earlier, but I used the time to read some more. After breakfast, it was still wonderfully sunny and windless, so I took advantage of the moment and enjoyed the shower I had planned yesterday. The air was almost not cold, and it was the best shower experience I had so far in Base Camp. I almost had to laugh when I realized that this was only my fourth shower since I left Kathmandu, and it had already been five weeks. Afterward, I finally took out my laptop and began writing about my experiences from the rotation. Since I was being quite thorough, time passed quickly, and before I knew it, the laptop battery was already dead. Less than 15 minutes later, it was lunchtime, so it didn’t bother me much. In the afternoon, I mostly played on my phone or chatted a bit with Dr. Berus or Alfredo, who oversee the medical care for Seven Summit Trek and 14Peaks. I also took advantage of the good Wi-Fi to have another video call with Raphael. We had a one-hour video call without interruption, so I now know what our five Schnüsis (a term of endearment) and he look like. He seems to be enjoying his time without his girlfriend at home, and I’m really happy about that. Even though I’m also looking forward to being back home, and for life to continue normally. 

By now, the kitchen crew had understood that I wanted to eat the same thing at every meal, so at 6:30 pm, after the hot towel before dinner, a plate with 2 fried eggs and fries arrived. The hot towel will especially be familiar to the regular readers of the Manaslu blog. Right before dinner, Pasang always appears with a pan, where a hot washcloth waits for everyone. It’s soaked with a little eucalyptus, making it a perfect warm refreshment before going to bed. The towel is too hot at first, and every day I try to catch the perfect moment to bury my face in it and let the heat sink into my body before it cools down. Shortly after this ritual, dinner appears, along with a small bowl of fruit.
 Today, I wanted to finish my book, so I stayed a little longer in the dining tent after dinner. But when everyone else had disappeared, I made my way back to my tent because Dipen’s instruction is always to work until the dining tent is empty. I didn’t want to drag it out artificially, because once the Russians were back, the evenings would become endless, and I wanted to give Dipen early evenings until then.So I read a little more in my tent until I got too tired. 

Sunday, May 4 – EBC 

Today is already my second rest day since my rotation. Yesterday afternoon, Gyalzen came by to warn me that we wouldn’t be going on our summit rotation before May 12. The fixing team had gone to Base Camp for two days of rest, and bad weather was forecast for May 5–6. They had set off again this morning for Camp 2, but there’s a lot of fresh snow above Camp 3, and no one knows how long it will take until they’ve made their way up to the South Col. Val, who wants to summit Everest this year without oxygen, also left this morning, because once the South Col is fixed, he wants to spend at least one night up there. For me, this means I can prepare for at least 9 more rest days, and I don’t know exactly how I want to spend that time. On one hand, I think the Base Camp is good enough to stay here, but on the other hand, recovery would probably go better further down in the valley. For me, it only makes sense to leave Base Camp if I get a significant improvement out of it. Going just to Dingboche or Namche would be a small improvement compared to the effort it would take to make that move. I’d prefer to fly to Kathmandu by helicopter, sleep well there, have a pizza every day, treat myself to a massage, and then fly back after five days. Apart from the fact that it goes against the principles I set before the expedition to fly to Kathmandu, it’s also environmentally and financially ridiculous. Still, all the benefits are tempting, especially when I hear this morning that Bianca and Paul flew to Kathmandu yesterday because Paul is still sick. I admit, that makes me quite jealous, and my cravings and longings grew strongly after hearing that.I also now know that a flight to KTM costs around 1000 USD, so a 5-day "trip" to KTM would cost me about 2500 USD when you include the hotel, etc. Even though I could probably afford it with the currently ridiculously low exchange rate, it’s simply too much for me. So, I have to prepare myself to stay here in EBC for the next 7–9 days. I’m curious to see how well I manage that, especially now that I’ve updated most of the blog and already enjoyed my shower. I still have laundry that I can wash once the weather gets better. Right now, it’s very cloudy and cold. Then, I have 3 puzzles to work on, an idea for a creative project, and with the good Wi-Fi, I can also order more puzzles anytime 😊 Now I just need to find the motivation for all of it. Today, I moved to the coffee tent to write the blog, where I drank a hot chocolate almost every hour. That’s how time passed after lunch, and now I’m sitting in our dining tent, trying to use the time after dinner to send out the blog. 

Sunday, May 4 – EBC 

Today is already my second rest day since my rotation. Yesterday afternoon, Gyalzen came by to warn me that we wouldn’t be going on our summit rotation before May 12. The fixing team had gone to Base Camp for two days of rest, and bad weather was forecast for May 5–6. They had set off again this morning for Camp 2, but there’s a lot of fresh snow above Camp 3, and no one knows how long it will take until they’ve made their way up to the South Col. Val, who wants to summit Everest this year without oxygen, also left this morning, because once the South Col is fixed, he wants to spend at least one night up there. For me, this means I can prepare for at least 9 more rest days, and I don’t know exactly how I want to spend that time. On one hand, I think the Base Camp is good enough to stay here, but on the other hand, recovery would probably go better further down in the valley. For me, it only makes sense to leave Base Camp if I get a significant improvement out of it. Going just to Dingboche or Namche would be a small improvement compared to the effort it would take to make that move. I’d prefer to fly to Kathmandu by helicopter, sleep well there, have a pizza every day, treat myself to a massage, and then fly back after five days. Apart from the fact that it goes against the principles I set before the expedition to fly to Kathmandu, it’s also environmentally and financially ridiculous. Still, all the benefits are tempting, especially when I hear this morning that Bianca and Paul flew to Kathmandu yesterday because Paul is still sick. I admit, that makes me quite jealous, and my cravings and longings grew strongly after hearing that.I also now know that a flight to KTM costs around 1000 USD, so a 5-day "trip" to KTM would cost me about 2500 USD when you include the hotel, etc. Even though I could probably afford it with the currently ridiculously low exchange rate, it’s simply too much for me. So, I have to prepare myself to stay here in EBC for the next 7–9 days. I’m curious to see how well I manage that, especially now that I’ve updated most of the blog and already enjoyed my shower. I still have laundry that I can wash once the weather gets better. Right now, it’s very cloudy and cold. Then, I have 3 puzzles to work on, an idea for a creative project, and with the good Wi-Fi, I can also order more puzzles anytime 😊 Now I just need to find the motivation for all of it. Today, I moved to the coffee tent to write the blog, where I drank a hot chocolate almost every hour. That’s how time passed after lunch, and now I’m sitting in our dining tent, trying to use the time after dinner to send out the blog. 

Friday, 18th of April - EBC 

The day once again began with waking up in a warm sleeping bag. Judging by the sounds outside, it wasn't going to be the sunniest day. When I finally peeled myself out of the sleeping bag shortly after 8 a.m. and unzipped the tent, I was greeted by about 5 cm of fresh snow and a partly cloudy sky. Juan Pedro was already sitting in the dining tent with a freshly made coffee in hand. We chatted a bit, and shortly afterward, breakfast was served. While we were eating, Valery slipped in, and by 9 a.m., Regina was also at the table. These are currently all the climbers present, although apparently more are expected to arrive today.

Yesterday, I finally met up with Jo, who, after 20 days of trekking and summiting Island Peak, has now arrived at her home base too. I got to know and appreciate her on Manaslu. She’s on Everest as a VIP, which means she has her own dining tent that she’ll be sharing with the six Russians who were also on Manaslu. After we had breakfast, she came over to us for a bit, and we chatted together.

I've now been uploading my blog for an hour and hope I can get everything online despite the snail-paced Wi-Fi.

Part II:
The attentive reader will probably guess where I’m sitting right now. There aren’t many options here. Our dining tent has quieted down a bit again after 21 Russians practically stormed in for lunch yesterday. But let’s start from the beginning and go back to last Friday.

Uploading the blog took me over two hours. That’s because I reorganized the homepage a bit and also had to translate the entire new text into English. I’m curious how many GB that will cost me each time. Shortly after I closed the laptop, lunch arrived. Most of the time, we have some kind of potatoes on our plates, along with either pasta or rice and eggs. Honestly, I can’t remember what exactly we had on Friday, but I do know that I returned every plate empty (Empty Plate No. 8–10?!). I always take my time with meals. Even though the food gets cold quickly, I just can’t scarf it down. And on rest days, you have all the time in the world—so why not enjoy eating slowly, too?

Even before lunch, I’d brought out a puzzle from my tent, which I continued working on during the wait and even while eating. It’s a Chinese wooden puzzle I ordered ages ago for very little money. The shapes of the pieces are different than usual, which helped time pass more easily. After that, I watched the fresh snow melt and once again chatted with Regina and Juan-Pedro.

As I passed by my tent later on, I noticed a small patch of artificial grass in front of it. The day before, the entire path between the tents had already been laid out with it, and I’d joked that they had forgotten my tent. Looks like they caught up on that now. I’m not entirely sure what the point of it is, but a bit of green can’t hurt in this otherwise white, red, and rocky landscape.

On Thursday evening, a group of Sherpas also headed into the Icefall to continue supplying Camp 2 with equipment. Chirring also set out to carry up some gear. He mentioned two tents and “other stuff,” whatever that might mean.

When the sun came out briefly in the afternoon, I decided to do a bit of handwashing. We’re hoping for sunny weather tomorrow, so the clothes should be dry by then at the latest. Doing laundry here is pretty simple: you let the kitchen crew know you want to wash clothes. They heat up a large jug of water and then give you two metal basins, one of which is already filled with hot water. In front of the kitchen tent is the Sherpa laundry station, and if it's free, you're allowed to use it.

I don’t know if I was doing it right—the few Sherpas who passed by the wash station either grinned or watched with mild curiosity before moving along. My approach was as follows: first, I put two or three items of clothing in the empty basin. Then I poured hot water from the other basin using a plastic cup, added a bit of soap, and swirled and rubbed the clothes until the water wasn’t quite so clear anymore. Then I wrung them out slightly and set them aside. I repeated the process until every item had at least briefly come into contact with soap and water. I also emptied the dirty water now and then. Afterward, I rinsed all the clothes again in clean water to get most of the dirt and especially the smell out. Finally, I wrung everything out well and packed it into a bag.

I walked back to our row of tents and carefully hung everything up. Just as I finished, another layer of clouds rolled in, so the clothes got maybe 20 minutes of sun at most. But since I still have plenty of clean clothes, it didn’t really matter. I hung my underwear up inside the tent just in case—it can get unexpectedly windy during the night.

After washing, I returned to the dining tent for the usual evening chats with Valery, Regina, and Juan-Pedro, and my Tolino e-reader. As always, it was straight into the sleeping bag shortly after dinner, either to try the Wi-Fi or to read a bit more.

Saturday, April 19 – EBC – Fiesta Mexicana

Today was marked by brilliant sunshine without even the tiniest cloud in the sky. Contrary to what the kitchen team had told us, no new guests arrived today. Honestly, we were all a bit relieved—somehow, we enjoy the calm and the slower pace without the hustle and bustle.

Once again, I had fried eggs with toast and a piece of fruit for breakfast. Afterward, I wanted to do a bit of reading when Juan-Pedro suddenly said it was too hot inside the tent and he wanted to sit outside for a bit. No sooner said than done—everyone grabbed a chair, and we headed down to our row of tents. At the end of the row, there’s a little spot with a direct view of the Icefall. Juan-Pedro’s tent is there, and from now on we’re calling it his front yard.

I also dragged along a thermos full of black tea, and Dipen came with us to make sure we had everything we needed. It was beautifully calm with no wind, so we sat there in our thin long-sleeved sun hoodies—Juan-Pedro with a Mexican hat, and I even rolled up my pants and went barefoot for a while. Unfortunately, I had forgotten that my legs hadn’t seen the sun in ages. The result came the next day in the form of a rather annoying sunburn on my shins.

But the two hours in the sun were truly enjoyable. We watched climbers on the route through the Icefall or others practicing their techniques on the glacier. We listened to music and sat together in silence. I also brought out the Theos—after all, they also need regular sunlight and fresh air 😊

Valery had set off toward Camp 1 in the morning, and we wondered whether we might catch a glimpse of him somewhere. But the distance was too great to see more than moving figures.

When it was time for lunch, we happily headed toward the dining tent, which was still very warm inside. A bit later, Juan-Pedro went to fetch all the chairs again, and once more we were amazed at how little it takes to be completely out of breath up here. We’re talking about carrying four chairs over 150 meters with about 10 meters of elevation gain.

After lunch, I read a bit more, and when it got cooler, I moved into my tent. Most of the laundry had already dried, so I could bring it back inside. I also changed into my nightwear early because around 4 PM I headed to the coffee tent of the company 8K Expeditions, where I had plans to meet up with some other climbers over a hot chocolate.

The official path goes 20 meters down and back up again, with the tent maybe 400 meters away as the crow flies. But I chose a path through the Sherpa tents, where I got a few odd looks now and then. Still, I made it safely to the coffee tent in about 10 minutes.

There, I met Julia—a Russian who lives in Zermatt. I had exchanged a couple of sentences with her on the way from the summit to Camp 4 on Manaslu. We mostly kept in touch through occasional text messages on Instagram.

Then there was Bianca from Australia—the youngest person to summit Manaslu, whom I also met last year at base camp. When we were all stuck in Samagaun, we had long and meaningful conversations. She’s here now with her father, aiming to become the youngest Australian (male or female) to summit Everest.

Her father had climbed Everest with her mother 20 years ago. Well, her mother summited Everest while Paul had to turn back due to an oxygen tank malfunction—he summited the year after. This will now be his third expedition.

There were also two Brazilians there, but they left shortly after and were replaced by Mitch. I had run into Mitch 1.5 years ago on Ama Dablam. He was on his way back to Camp 1 after his summit, while we were on our way up. We met briefly at the Yellow Tower—the most rockfall-prone section—so we only exchanged a few words. Still, he remembered me when I spoke to him briefly this year in Lukla.

Now we finally had more time to talk. His path to Everest is probably the most impressive I’ve ever heard. His journey started on September 15th: he set out to complete the world’s longest triathlon. First, he swam from England across the Channel to France, then biked from there to India. From India, he ran a series of marathons all the way to Kathmandu. He stayed overnight at the British Embassy there and then followed in Edmund Hillary’s footsteps, trekking to Lukla. After a 10-day rest, he continued to EBC with his trekking group.

Now he’s here, preparing like everyone else for the summit attempt on Mount Everest. If you want to follow his journey in detail, just search for Mitch Hutchcraft on YouTube or Instagram.

After two hours of laughing and chatting, I headed back to our dining tent, where everyone else had already gathered so we could eat dinner together.

 Sunday, April 20 – EBC – Happy Birthday Daddy

 Another rest day was on the agenda today. I’m honestly getting tired of just sitting around—I can hardly wait to finally do something different. But today would have been my dad’s 77th birthday, and I took that as an opportunity to head down to the glacier after breakfast and build a little smiley face and a heart out of stones for him. I took my time—I certainly have enough of it today. It’s actually fun doing things like that out here, since I haven’t really done anything like it since I was a child. 

The sun was shining once again from a cloudless sky, and there wasn’t much wind either. Other than that, today’s summary is simple: I ate three meals, tried multiple times to get the Wi-Fi to work, drank my usual 3 liters of tea and/or water, visited the pee tent regularly, and read an entire book. 

Around 4 p.m., I found myself back in the coffee tent—this time in our own, as it’s now open. We had agreed yesterday to meet there today because it’s bigger than the 8K tent. It was the same crew as yesterday, but this time Bianca’s father was also there, as well as Ewan, a Californian I’d only spoken to briefly at Manaslu, but who still remembered my down suit. Bella was there too—she trekked to EBC with Mitch and is spending a week here. She wants to write a book in the next few years about why people climb 8000-meter peaks and plans to attempt Everest herself in two years. A few days ago, she summited Lobuche East with Mitch’s group, and after leaving EBC, she’ll also be trying Island Peak before heading home at the end of the month. 

She read us her editorial, and we already know the book will be a great one. I’m curious how long it will take before I can hold it in my hands. I’ll have to be patient for a few years, but life has already shown me a few times that the wait is often worth it. 

Today, Mitch and I discovered that our connections to Everest have lasted about the same number of years and have evolved in a similar way. It’s always fascinating talking to him, even though he speaks at a breakneck pace. Luckily, I’m not new to English—otherwise I wouldn’t understand a word. He seems a bit like someone driven by something, who can hardly believe that after all these years, he’s really here to attempt Everest. I feel the same way, and I see the same emotions in his eyes that I feel: disbelief, pride, respect, a little fear, and a whole lot of anticipation. 

During those hours in the coffee tent, we talked about all kinds of things. It’s always fascinating to me how quickly strangers can open up and talk about very personal topics. Everyone is here for a different reason, yet within minutes, we become a kind of community you don’t find anywhere else. Anyone who has been on a mountain expedition will understand that feeling. I won’t even try to explain it further—you simply have to experience it yourself to understand what I mean. Take this as an invitation to sign up for a multi-day trek (no, it doesn’t have to be in the Himalayas) or to plan one on your own and go out and do it. I promise you won’t regret it. 

Around the usual time, it was time to leave the coffee tent—no one wants to be late for dinner. I was greeted by Chirring and Gyalzen, who told me that tomorrow we’d finally be heading onto the glacier for some practice, so that I’ll be ready whenever we’re cleared to move toward Camp 1. After dinner, I packed the essentials into my backpack so I’d be ready to go in the morning. 

 Monday, April 21 – EBC – Glacier Training

 Another sunny day awaited me as I stepped out of the tent this morning. Embarrassingly, the kitchen crew had to come get me out of my tent because I mistakenly thought breakfast was at 8:30 a.m. Since Saturday, it’s actually been at 8:00, and I had simply forgotten. I’d been awake since 6:30 a.m., as usual, just couldn’t convince myself to get up. So at 8:15, Dipen had to come down to my tent to check if everything was okay. I felt a bit ashamed, since I usually make a point of being on time. The kitchen crew, led by Nathi, does an excellent job, and I don’t want to make things harder for them. They fulfill every request, listen to us, and do everything to make sure we’re well taken care of. I’m deeply impressed every day by how much love and attention to detail they put into their work and how much we matter to them. Being late feels like a no-go. But they took it with humor, and five minutes later I was already sitting in front of another plate of toast and a hot veggie omelet. 

I took my time eating, and at 9 a.m., Gyalzen showed up to tell me we’d be heading out around 9:30. After breakfast, I went back to the tent to change clothes for training. I wanted to pack all my gloves so I could practice with each pair and mentally prepare myself for the first steps in my big boots since Manaslu. Regina and Juan-Pedro would also be practicing on the glacier today, so we all met at 10 a.m. at the already prepared course. 

The goal for me was to get back into the rhythm of walking on ladders, using the ascender, and rappelling. The first round was a disaster. I tried to drive the front points of my crampons into the ice, where they wouldn’t hold. Still, I put my full weight on the spikes, which promptly slipped. Within two minutes, I had two aching knees and started questioning what I was doing here. I know I can do better than that—it just seemed like I needed a few minutes to get my head back into it. Completely out of breath and in pain, I reached the top. My harness was also a bit too tight, and it felt like breakfast was about to come back out—one way or another. So I took a few minutes on the platform to calm down and focus on the short traverse. That part went fine, although I didn’t fully trust my crampons yet. 

The final part was rappelling, and Gyalzen insisted on clipping the rope into my device for me. Strangely enough, the 11-meter vertical wall didn’t bother me at all, and I was back down in half a minute. Still, I wasn’t happy with my first run. The pain in my knees would probably stick around for a few days—totally unnecessary. While Regina and Juan-Pedro were doing their run, I took some time to drink and focus on what I can do. I practiced a few rounds on the ladder and quickly remembered how to position the steps under my boots. I also tried to lean forward so that the rope would stay taut without help from Gyalzen or Chirring. I really hope I can manage that on the actual route—there, the ladders will be hanging above deep glacier crevasses. 

The second round went much better. I took more time to place my front points properly, and I’d adjusted the harness beforehand. Luckily, the sore knees didn’t really slow me down, and after just under five minutes, I was back at the bottom. I kept going for a while longer, doing multiple rounds on the ropes and constantly switching gloves so I could practice every motion with liner gloves, thick fingered gloves, and even my heaviest mitts. When I had to wait, I crossed the ladder a few more times and made sure to climb both to the left and right of the rope and switch arms so I wouldn’t build habits and would tire my arm muscles evenly. The Icefall route changes all the time, so I want to be mentally prepared for that. 

After just under two hours, the training session wrapped up and we packed everything away. I was content and just hoped I wouldn’t be sore the next day—otherwise, it would really shake my confidence. The normal duration through the Icefall is 6–8 hours, so if I was already sore after 2 hours of training, that would be a bit discouraging. 

We headed back to the dining tent for lunch, as usual. When we arrived, there was a bit of commotion—apparently 21 Russians were expected for lunch, trekking toward EBC. Luckily, we were able to eat in peace before they arrived. As soon as someone said they were five minutes away, I gathered my things and made my way to the coffee tent. On the way, I passed the group—some of them looked totally wiped out. I greeted a few, but got no response, so I left it at that and disappeared into the coffee tent. I was enjoying a hot chocolate when one of the Russian women—probably a guide—came in and started talking on the phone with Tashi. Tashi owns 14peaks, and his brother runs a helicopter company. Apparently, some of the trekkers wanted to fly straight back to Namche or Kathmandu—they didn’t want to spend another minute at altitude. During lunch, the kitchen crew told me that five of them were planning to stay and attempt Everest. Turns out they’re the same five I briefly encountered at Manaslu Base Camp last year. We had our own dining tent then, so we only interacted with them outdoors or in the coffee tent. They usually sat outside on rest days, one of them smoking a pipe, and in the evenings you could hear guitar music coming from their tent. 

I wasn’t alone in the coffee tent for long—soon Bella, Bianca, Mitch, Ben, Ewan, and the rest trickled in, and we stayed there until just before 6 p.m. At some point in between, I went to my tent to put on warmer clothes. Once the sun goes down, it gets significantly colder. It also helps to change while the tent is still a bit warm, not after dinner when it’s already freezing. 

I wasn’t particularly looking forward to dinner. The Russians had taken over the whole dining tent, and thankfully Regina and Juan-Pedro were there and saved me a seat. So the three of us squeezed into a corner of the table to eat. The other two left shortly after dinner, and I didn’t stay in the tent much longer either. Some people were coughing, and I felt too cramped in the corner, as if I couldn’t get enough air to breathe. I tried to decline the piece of cake they offered me—unsuccessfully—so out of politeness, I ate two or three spoonfuls and then slipped off to my tent. There, I read a little more and hoped for a calmer day tomorrow. 

 Tuesday, April 22 – EBC

 The night was quiet once again, although I woke up two or three times as people were still heading to bed late in the evening. It seemed like the dining tent had been occupied longer than usual. I headed over a bit earlier than normal this morning to make sure I could get a seat at the table with Regina and Juan-Pedro. They were already there, having their breakfast. They were leaving us for 3–4 days to climb Lobuche East. I'm curious to see what these days will be like without them—they’ve always been great listeners and conversational partners, and we share a similar sense of humor. I hope their outing will be worth it and that they’ll return well-acclimatized and happy. 

After saying goodbye to them, I went back to my tent to enjoy a bit of peace and quiet. The trekking Russians also left after breakfast, so by around 10 a.m., the dining tent had quieted down again. As I sat there, Dipen from the kitchen crew let me know that another large group would be arriving for lunch today—this time, 14 Indians. I got my lunch a little earlier again, so I was already in the middle of eating when the Indian group stormed into the tent. Within moments, I was surrounded by them, as the whole group wanted to sit together at one table, even though the other table was half empty. So I picked up my lunch and switched tables so they could have their wish granted. 

I followed the same strategy as yesterday—after lunch, I disappeared into the coffee tent, where I once again had top-notch company with the usual suspects for the entire afternoon. This time, Nelly Attar joined us as well—she’s known on social media, among other things, for her mountain clean-up campaigns. 

Right at 6 p.m., we parted ways again—I was hoping dinner would be a bit less chaotic this time. I sat from the start at the table with the Russians to make sure the Indians would have enough space. But as soon as I’d eaten, I made my way to the Seven Summit Treks camp. Most of my coffee tent friends were staying there, and they’d invited me many times to come over if things got too boring, cramped, or noisy on my side. 

Just ten minutes later, I was sitting in a warm tent full of funny and open people. They were still in the middle of their dinner, but were happy to see me. I ended up staying almost two hours, during which I analyzed photos from Paul, Bianca’s father, of his Everest summits in 2006 and 2007. It gave me a great overview of parts of the route I hadn’t seen in pictures before. It was also interesting to hear about his experiences and what he focused on during his second climb. 

We even started planning a joint acclimatization hike to Pumori High Camp for tomorrow—but that plan was crushed half an hour later when the Base Camp Manager gave a briefing announcing Seven Summit’s schedule for tomorrow: glacier training in the morning and oxygen training in the afternoon. 

Around 9:30 p.m., I made my way back to our camp, quickly filled my bottles with hot water in the dining tent, and then slipped into my sleeping bag. 

 Wednesday, April 23 – Pumori High Camp

 Today was another acclimatization day. Since Chirring and Gyalzen set off towards Camp 2 last night, I was going to be out on my own today. It was almost funny how motherly the two of them were yesterday when I told them I’d be fine going solo. They told me exactly what to pack (the same stuff I’ve been packing for the past three weeks), that I should apply sunscreen in the morning, and not hike too fast—as if I’d never been out on my own back home. But it shows me how much they care about making sure I’m well-prepared, and also that they trust me at least a little. I promised them I’d check in as soon as I got back and take good care of myself, especially on the way down. 

So after breakfast, I set out just before 9 a.m. toward the lower end of EBC. That part takes about 20 minutes. The famous EBC rock marks the start of base camp, and no matter what time of day you pass by, someone’s always posing in front of, on, or around it. After about half an hour, I was already on the ridge that lines the edge of the glacier, ready for the steep climb toward High Camp. I took the path I remembered, but clearly veered a bit off course near some rocks. I ended up in a scree field and had to fight my way through it slowly and carefully—big rocks, small rocks, slippery rocks, solid rocks, gravel, scree, and dirt—I worked my way in the right direction. I knew I’d reconnect with the path at some point, and after 40 minutes, I saw a small group climbing just above me. Less than five minutes later, I was back on the trail. 

I decided to follow that group to make sure I didn’t lose the path again. That worked well—they were hiking just a bit faster than the pace I’d set for myself. I was walking at a rhythm where I could easily recite "Om mani padme om" in sync with my steps. When the group took a break, I continued on alone, since the path was still clearly visible. About 20 meters below the first platform of High Camp, I took a wrong turn again and had to scramble a bit. But since the slope wasn’t steep and the rocks were solid, it wasn’t a problem. 

Beyond the platform, I could see another faint trail heading further up, so I continued another 50 meters of elevation until I found a good spot to sit in the shelter of the wind. I spent a good hour there enjoying the view. I’d also brought the two Theos with me today, so they had to pose for a few photos too. There were two other groups there—I took some group shots for them, and they returned the favor by taking pictures of me. 

After just under 70 minutes, I packed everything up and started heading back. The path was easier to follow on the way down, and I always had a group in sight to help guide me, just in case. Only 30 minutes after setting off, I was already back on the side ridge along the glacier. My legs felt great both on the way up and down. I did get a bit more out of breath than expected while scrambling, but that’s probably because I moved a bit faster than I’d planned. 

Since I knew my tentmate from Aconcagua, Rebekka, had arrived at EBC yesterday, I didn’t want to miss the chance to visit her at her camp. She’s with Furtenbach, whose camp is near the lower end. Around 12:30 p.m., I walked into their dining tent and saw her surprised face. I was immediately offered a drink and invited to stay for lunch, but I’d promised my kitchen crew I’d eat with them, so I politely declined. Still, I really enjoyed the 40-minute visit—we caught up on small things. Hopefully, we’ll find more time to talk properly. Last time we saw each other was in Salzburg, when I spontaneously visited her for 24 hours in October while she was on vacation there. Mitch happened to be there too, having been invited to lunch by the company heads. 

When the group was called for their Puja ceremony, I set off again and walked the last 20 minutes back to my camp. I went straight to the dining tent so they’d know I made it back safely. Then I changed quickly so I could be somewhat clean for lunch. Unfortunately, I already had a bit of a headache, so I had to force myself to eat. It took me almost an hour to get through half the salad, and another 20 minutes for the small fruit plate for dessert. I drank a few cups of tea, but none of it helped get rid of the headache. 

For the first time since being here, I spent the second half of the afternoon in my sleeping bag, dozing a bit. I took a pill to ease the headache, but it didn’t fully work, so I still felt a bit drained by the time dinner came around. Even then, I couldn’t eat everything and went straight back to bed after brushing my teeth. I read for a bit, but with the headache, I just didn’t feel all that great. 

 Thursday, April 24 – EBC – Puja at Seven Summit Treks 

After going to bed with a headache last night, I had a rather restless night. Unlike usual, I had to get up twice during the night to pee. I saw headlamps in the Icefall each time, but they were moving much more slowly than on the nights when the Sherpas were out. I also had to take a second pill in order to get at least some sleep. When I woke up this morning, there was still a dull throbbing. I assume it’s coming from my neck, as the pillow is unfortunately too high, so my neck muscles can’t really relax. We’ll see if it improves over the next few days or not. 

In any case, I got up on time for breakfast and ate the vegetable omelette with Tibetan bread. Afterwards, I read a little, briefly talked with one of the Russian women, Anastasiia, who is unfortunately a bit sick, and then decided to do a bit of laundry again. Just like for the past week, the weather is wonderfully sunny, though very windy. That didn’t bother me—I still washed and hung up a few shirts, pants, and buffs. Nathi even gave me some clothespins so the clothes wouldn’t blow away. 

Then I headed over to the Seven Summit Treks camp, where the Puja ceremony was taking place today. I was able to watch the whole thing from the outside, which was actually quite nice for a change. Still, it felt strange that all my friends were being blessed, and I had to imagine experiencing the same ceremony tomorrow with almost complete strangers. People put rice flour on their faces, congratulate and hug each other, etc. All things I would have loved to be part of today—but could only watch from the sidelines. 

I hope tomorrow will feel warmer and more heartfelt than I’m imagining it now. Ideally, Regina and Juan-Pedro will also be back tomorrow, so at least I’ll have two familiar faces around. I didn’t feel like I belonged, even though—aside from not participating—there wasn’t really a reason for that. After the blessing, everyone stood in small groups, took photos, laughed, filmed videos, and I was just a passive observer. 

At least I finally got to thank Kristin Harila today for what she’s doing for us women in mountaineering. She’s one of the reasons I had the courage to finally take on Everest. I had reached out to her 2–3 times over the past three years, and she always responded thoughtfully. Being able to finally thank her in person for how important she’s been to me and my project makes me incredibly happy. Of course, it didn’t happen without tears this time either. I have no idea what it is about Everest that does this to me. I’m just so happy and proud, and I almost can’t express it without tears. Especially when I think that the 28 years I’ve been waiting for this have now been condensed into just one month. 

When all the blessed climbers gathered for a group photo, that was my cue to head back to my tent. I cuddled with the Theos and let out the rest of my tears. Then I checked on my almost-dry laundry and made my way to the dining tent, where lunch will be served in about half an hour. 


Friday, April 25 – EBC – Puja 

Yesterday's lunch was, surprisingly, a burger – maybe with a bit too much cheese, but otherwise quite good. Afterwards, I went to my tent to tidy up my clothes and enjoy a bit of time to myself. Then I headed to the dining tent to finish writing the blog. To upload it, I moved a bit closer to the router – aka the coffee tent – where I tried to get something done over two hot chocolates. Unfortunately, the upload didn’t go as planned, so I enlisted my sister as a blog assistant. 

Just as I was about to leave the coffee tent, Mitch and Stan showed up. So I treated myself to a third cup of hot chocolate and had a nice chat with them about the Puja, the schedule, and more. It’s always interesting talking with those two. Stan only stays in EBC part-time – his base is three hours away at the Italian Pyramid. He spends most of his time editing Mitch’s YouTube videos and Instagram content so that everything gets finished on time. To be honest, I haven’t watched any of the YouTube videos yet, but I’ll catch up after the expedition. I think the two of them are looking forward to the "after" just as much as I am. 

I already find the expedition mentally exhausting, but I don’t have to think about paying employees, producing content, writing press releases, etc., and I’m honestly glad about that. Here in EBC, I can pretty much live day by day. I wouldn’t even have to write this blog if I didn’t want to – I could just read, sleep, hydrate, and wait until I get to climb. I think I’ve only posted on Instagram three times in the last four weeks, and only because everyone around me was posting, and I could mostly copy their content. Even after Manaslu, I didn’t really feel like posting anything on social media – somehow it just doesn’t feel that important to me. 

Anyway, the conversation with those two really did me good, and finally, I started to feel some excitement about my Puja. 

I can’t really remember what we had for dinner – probably Veggie Sizzler, since we’ve had that three times already. After that, I went straight to bed to be ready for the Puja today. 

The Puja took place shortly after breakfast. I was one of the first ones there and managed to get a great seat – even with a rock for back support, just in case. But first, I had to get my gear and place it at the shrine. Two days ago, Furtenbach said that we should bring anything that would touch the mountain. I always bring everything that gives me a sense of safety on the mountain: boots, crampons, harness, and helmet. Since I was one of the first again, my gear was placed right by the shrine – I take that as a good omen. Then I sat down and read a little until everyone else was ready. 

For the Pujas, a Lama always comes with an assistant. The Lama chants (or rather, sings) prayers, while the assistant occasionally beats a small drum, and the Lama also clashes cymbal-like instruments. The purpose of the Puja is to ask for a "safe passage" – meaning a safe ascent and descent. Prayers are chanted for all the mountains surrounding Everest, as well as for Everest itself. Rice and/or rice powder is thrown into the air during the ceremony. 

We listeners were given some black tea from time to time to stay hydrated, and I was grateful to be wearing both a hat and a buff – it was quite windy and sunny. 

At the end of the Puja, everyone received a yellow string bracelet and a khata scarf around their neck. The yellow string should not be removed, as it offers protection. The khata also symbolizes protection but can be taken off later. I've hung all the khatas I’ve received so far in my tent and will take them home, like everyone else. Anyone who’s visited my place in the last three years will probably remember the white scarves hanging everywhere. 

Since I once again want to hang prayer flags on the summit, I had bought a few in Kathmandu that now needed to be blessed. Pengboche would have been a good time for that, but I had packed the prayer flags in my climbing duffle, which went missing for a while during the trek. So now, Chirring asked the Lama if he could bless the flags – which he did without hesitation. 

We also took a few group photos so we could remember this day. Afterward, I went into the dining tent, as it was quite windy outside. After the meal, Chirring, Gyalzen, and I were going to sit down together and work out a new schedule – so I’d have a better sense of what’s planned and wouldn’t get too caught up in negative thoughts just because everyone else is heading out on their rotations before me, even though I was the first one in base camp. 

The Sherpas’ suggestion was to do a dry run in the Icefall tomorrow. This means going up about halfway and then coming back down. In Chirring's words, it was: 3 hours up, 1 hour down. My suggestion was to start the rotation so that we would be ready for the summit after 5 days on the mountain, once the fixing team had finished their work. 

I didn’t really like the Sherpa suggestion, because, firstly, I didn’t want to spend too many unnecessary hours in the Icefall, and secondly, I finally wanted to start my rotation. I also feared that if I waited any longer, I would be in the Icefall with too many other people, which would bring long waiting times, cold, and risks. I also asked Phunuru what he thought of the plan. Unfortunately, he had no internet and couldn’t give me an answer. It was also hard to get a somewhat reliable weather report because the Wi-Fi was, once again, very slow. It’s one of those moments where you have to make a decision, and only later (maybe) will you find out if you made the right or wrong choice. 

I have two guiding principles that I want to stick to here on Everest: I want to attempt the summit during the first weather window, and I want to make sure that all three of us have at least 3 rest days before that. I want to use the first weather window because, based on experience, there aren’t as many people on the mountain yet since they’re not ready. The three rest days for all of us should be clear to everyone – we need to be well-rested when we make our double attempt, including Chirring and Gyalzen, since they play such a big role in our safety on the mountain. 

Our discussion after dinner wasn’t too long, because the two of them didn’t want to be swayed from their plan, and I wasn’t born to be the boss, so I didn’t want to force my suggestion on them. I was still torn between “spend as little time as possible in the Icefall” and “just trust the Sherpas,” but I didn’t want to make the decision alone. So, we agreed that we would all think about the options some more, I would try to get a weather report, and we would discuss it again at dinner. 

Afterwards, I went once again to the coffee tent, where I met the usual suspects. I also had a brief chat with Paul, who has a lot of Everest experience. He said that he also did a dry run back in the day and actually found it quite useful. Still, the general consensus was that everyone would rather start the rotation than do a dry run. To me, the reason for the dry run wasn’t clear, not even after the meeting with Chirring and Gyalzen in the afternoon. It felt unnecessary, and because I didn’t understand it, the plan bothered me even more after the conversations. 

Once again, Stan helped me avoid getting stuck in negative thoughts. He was able to explain to me rationally that it’s not a big deal if I don’t start the rotation like everyone else. There is still plenty of time, and he’s confident that, no matter which option we choose, I will still have a real shot at the summit. I also got distracted from my thoughts when we had an interesting conversation with Kristin about her numerous expeditions. She is waiting for her helicopter permit in China to finally find the Sherpa who was swept away by an avalanche on Shishapangma on my birthday in 2023. 

For those who don’t know Kristin Harila: She broke the speed record for climbing all 14 8000-meter peaks. It only took her 92 days to achieve this. In 2022, she made her first attempt and stood on 13 out of 14 peaks. Unfortunately, she was denied permission by China to climb Shishapangma, so her attempt failed, and Nimsdai remained the record holder. Nimsdai is the Nepali climber behind the amazing Netflix film (and book) 14 Peaks. She told us yesterday that the moment she got the “no” from China, she knew she would make another attempt in 2023. That year, she shuffled the order of her climbs and actually got permission from China for Shishapangma and Cho Oyu in the spring. Both peaks are climbed from China, although Cho Oyu can theoretically also be climbed from Nepal, which is extremely difficult (Gelje from AGA Adventures managed to achieve this last year after the route had been abandoned for a long time – just google it). 

Back to Kristin: Once she had the permits, she climbed all 14 peaks in those 92 days, always with her Sherpa Lama by her side. They were celebrated worldwide for this, and now it was clear to everyone that Lama is the best Sherpa around. While Kristin was chasing the record, two American women were in a race to become the first American women to climb all 14 8000-meter peaks. Their names were Anna and Gina-Marie, and both had already summited 13 peaks, only missing Shishapangma. They both received permits, and Gina-Marie wanted the best Sherpa by her side. So, Lama, even though he didn’t have to, went to China once more to help her succeed. 

Shishapangma is already a dangerous mountain in the spring, but in the autumn, it’s even more dangerous due to its steep slopes, which are perfect for avalanches. On my 39th birthday, the mountain had had enough and buried both Gina-Marie’s team and Anna Gutu’s team with her Sherpa. All four died, though Anna and her Sherpa were found and brought home last year. Gina-Marie and Lama are still somewhere on the mountain, and Kristin has made it her goal to bring his body back. I think she will only find peace with her life once she has accomplished this. She takes great care of Lama’s family, especially his two sons; she was trekking with the younger one, who is now back in Kathmandu in school. 

These coffee tent conversations are the heart of this expedition and, for me, and I think for many others as well, they are very important. The great community comes together here, and everyone is in the same boat. Everyone I have spoken to so far is extremely open. It doesn’t matter whether you’ve climbed one 8000-meter peak or already 27. It doesn’t matter whether you’re here "just" for the trek or for the triple crown (Everest, Lhotse, Nuptse). You sit together at the table, listen to each other, and the depth of the conversations comes very quickly. I’ve mentioned before that it was very important for me to thank Kristin for her extraordinary achievement. I feel deeply sorry that such a negative impact has affected her life. Positive and negative are so closely intertwined, and I’m certainly not the only one hoping that Kristin will soon get the permit and find Lama’s body this spring. 

As I walked back to my dining tent in thought, a nice dinner was waiting for me, which helped me feel a bit more positive. I wasn’t able to find a weather report, but I did manage to get a wind report from our camp doctor. After dinner, Chirring and Gyalzen returned, and together we discussed the wind report in front of our tent. After a few minutes, a Sherpa came around the corner with a radio and told them something. Apparently, an avalanche from Nuptse had hit the route between Camp 1 and Camp 2, causing the route to be temporarily interrupted. This was a reason for my Sherpas to stick with the dry run. I accepted this decision, and we agreed that we would leave at 6 am. They also informed me about what I would need to pack, mainly warm clothing, as it would be very windy tomorrow, and we didn’t know how many people we would encounter in the Icefall. 

I immediately went to the tent to pack my things and then lay down in bed, planning to have breakfast at 5 am so that I wouldn’t end up in the same situation as during the training, when the food couldn’t decide whether to come up or down. Just before going to sleep, I wanted to quickly check my messages and Instagram. There, I saw that, apparently, a part of the route in the Icefall had collapsed in the past few hours. All those who had planned to start their rotation at night canceled their plans and stayed in the EBC. I lay in bed and had to admit to myself that I should really trust Chirring and Gyalzen’s suggestions 100%. Because their suggestion for the dry run now seemed perfect, since we wouldn’t have been able to go any further anyway. I took this as a sign from Everest, showing me that I have very capable Sherpas and that I should trust myself as well. I’ve already verbally told many people that since my first visit to the Khumbu Valley in 2017, I’ve felt a connection to my dream mountain. Once again, I felt that connection right now, lying in my sleeping bag in the EBC, and I made a resolution to trust Everest, that it would give me my chance. 



 Saturday, April 26 – Dry Run in the Icefall

 It felt strange to be woken up by an alarm again today. For the past 2–3 weeks, I had always woken up early enough on my own since I was also going to bed early. But now the clock said 4:30 a.m. I stayed in my warm sleeping bag for another 10 minutes until I felt mentally ready to crawl out. I had already put my clothes into the sleeping bag the night before, so I could get dressed inside the bag. Then I checked once more that everything I needed was in my backpack: I packed my down pants, my thick down jacket, thick gloves, and hand warmers—after all, I didn’t want to have to turn back because of cold fingers. My thermos bottles also went into the backpack, along with sunscreen, etc. 

At 5 a.m., I headed to the kitchen tent. Dipen had told me yesterday to just stop by the kitchen tent, and someone would make me black tea. I had planned to eat just cornflakes so they wouldn’t have to cook too much so early in the morning. Unfortunately, the kitchen tent was still closed and deserted at 5 a.m. So I sat in the cold dining tent and ate my cornflakes. Without tea, it was a pretty dry experience, but there wasn’t much I could do about it. At 5:10, I heard the stove light up in the kitchen tent and realized I’d just been overly Swiss about being on time at exactly 5 a.m. 

So I went down and was warmly greeted by Nathi. He made me two cups of tea and would’ve even cooked something for me if I had let him. After that, I went to my tent to put on my big boots. It only takes about five minutes down here, but I always have to focus to make sure there are no folds in my socks or thermals—otherwise, I risk blisters. I also tried taping my usual problem spot on my lower leg. Note to self: tape doesn’t stick to human skin in subzero temperatures. Once I was ready, I made one more stop at the pee tent—because let’s be honest, you don’t want to die in the Icefall with your pants down just because you couldn’t outrun a chunk of ice 😉. 

Lastly, I put on my climbing harness so I wouldn’t have to do it in the cold of the Icefall. Chirring and Gyalzen were ready as well, and after another hot cup of tea, we first headed to our Puja shrine, circled it once clockwise, and then took a fairly direct route down to the glacier. It took us about 30 minutes to reach the Crampon Point, which was different from the one we visited about two weeks ago. The first part of the route mostly leads over flat glacier ice and rocks, so it’s easy to walk the first 30 minutes without crampons. 

Then came the final bathroom break before putting on crampons and getting into the real thing. Interestingly, we still had another 30 minutes of mostly rock, although it was steeper and sometimes covered in meltwater. Surprisingly, the crampons actually gave great traction. Just before the first vertical section, we encountered the only people coming in the opposite direction—a Westerner and his Sherpa. That was also the Crampon Point for the Icefall Doctors. We figured this out when six of them showed up, getting ready to enter the Icefall to repair the collapsed section. 

We, meanwhile, headed to the base of the first vertical section to use our ascenders for the first time. I tried to stick to the rhythm that worked for me on Manaslu: step, breathe in and out deeply twice, step, breathe deeply twice, and so on. It takes longer to get to the top that way, but I never get out of breath and can focus on technique. Chirring was ahead of me, Gyalzen behind. The Sherpa version of this section is a little different: wait for a gap, then take 5–6 fast steps, wait again, repeat. It feels more like intervals, which is why I don’t do it that way. I also think it’s nicer for anyone waiting below to see steady progress rather than someone standing still for five minutes catching their breath. 

Now we were really in the Icefall—ascending, descending, clipping in and out—and I tried to focus on the route. Chirring would wait for me at each anchor to hold the rope I needed to clip into next. On ascents, I felt like I got out of breath quickly, but after a 10-second pause, I always recovered fast. We had to jump over a small crevasse and passed a spot that made me nervous—narrow icy steps that looked like they wouldn’t hold my weight. But since Chirring, who’s a bit heavier, went ahead, I tried to trust the steps. I’m pretty sure they’ll be gone next time—they were that thin. 

After an unknown amount of time—somewhere between 30 minutes and 15 hours—we reached an open area that looked like an avalanche cone. Above the Icefall on the right is a glacier section that regularly breaks off, and the route passes through its debris. Luckily, it’s fairly flat there, so we passed through in under a minute. Still, I asked which direction to run in case something came down at the wrong time. Despite the visible dangers, I felt totally comfortable and didn’t perceive the Icefall as threatening. The path was wide, I saw plenty of passing spots, and there were no threatening seracs in sight. So we continued. 

We crossed three ladders, all (in my opinion) used correctly: in vertical sections, usually to enter steep ice walls followed by another 10-meter climb. All of these had small steps to clearly place your feet and 2–3 ropes for rappelling even if someone was climbing up. One ladder section looked like a potential bottleneck, though, as the rappel ropes met the ascent path. Curious to see if I’ll get stuck there someday. At least there's a decently safe waiting area, though probably very cold. 

About two hours in, Chirring and Gyalzen suddenly seemed a bit nervous. I asked if this was a spot where we should move faster—they nodded. So I “ran” behind Chirring. "Ran" is an exaggeration—I just walked at my normal pace from home. Anything faster isn’t possible at this altitude anyway. After a few minutes, I needed a break, which thankfully I was given. We ducked under and between seracs, went up and down again, then climbed onto a cornice. Now we were really in the heart of the Icefall—and I was still enjoying it. 

Shortly after, the route split into two: the old and the new path. We followed the new one, but a large, stable-looking ice chunk dropped a meter when Chirring stepped on it. That made my brain go into overdrive—it really looked solid. Chirring hesitated, clearly trusting the old route more. So he crossed about five meters of ice blocks, secured only to his climbing harness. I was relieved when we could clip into the rope again. We took our first real break there—before that, we only had a couple of short water or breathing pauses. 

Chirring said we’d go another 10–15 minutes and then turn back. Exactly 10 minutes later, we reached the point where part of the route had collapsed during the night. We stood at the end of the fixed rope and saw an Icefall Doctor about 100 meters ahead. It looked like they were trying to repair the route from above. For us, it meant turning back after exactly 2 hours and 26 minutes. My watch showed 5,694 meters—roughly 400 meters above base camp. According to Gyalzen, we were halfway to Camp 1. Based on the altitude reading, that seems about right. Distance-wise, I’m not so sure. But since I didn’t feel tired, I’m confident I could make it to Camp 1 at that pace—whenever the time comes. 

As we turned back on the narrow ridge, I noticed a huge hole on the right—the collapsed route. But the left side didn’t have much snow either. I realized we were standing on a not-very-stable, undercut cornice. That made me pick up the pace for at least the first five minutes. Going mostly downhill now, we moved much faster. Gyalzen was now ahead, Chirring behind. Unfortunately, Gyalzen was 1% less gentlemanly than Chirring, so I often had to bend down to grab and clip the rope myself. 

We retraced our route toward Crampon Point. On the vertical sections we ascended with ascenders earlier, we now rappelled down. So we were back at the Crampon Point after only 50 minutes, took off crampons and harnesses, and hiked the last stretch over rock—which is tricky in crampons. I had to stay super focused, as getting injured now would just be dumb. I was relieved to remove the crampons and walk the rest without them. Still downhill and requiring attention, but easier. I was back in my tent shortly after 10 a.m., where I changed into my base camp clothes. It had warmed up quite a bit on the way back, and I try to avoid sweating if I can. 

I stayed in the tent a bit, prepped a laundry bag, put everything back in its place, set my boots outside to dry in the sun, and messaged Raphael to let him know I was back. I think he was the only one who knew about my dry run—so no one else had any Once I connected to the Wi-Fi, I finally received a response from Phunuru to the question I had asked him yesterday. So I decided to give him a call. The connection was perfect, which allowed us to talk for almost half an hour about the best plan for the next three weeks. The goal now, assuming a good weather forecast, is to start our rotation on Monday, April 28, and spend five nights in the Western Cwm. That way, we should have at least three rest days before we go on our summit rotation. It would also give Chirring and Gyalzen enough time to bring the oxygen bottles to the right locations and get enough rest afterward. 

During the call, I munched on a few things from my still massive snack stash and then headed to the dining tent for lunch. I was lucky—it was Italian pasta, and under the incredulous eyes of the kitchen crew, I asked for seconds. After all, I had only had a single bowl of cornflakes for breakfast, and recovery works best with carbs. 

Although I was a bit tired from getting up so early, I didn’t want to nap. So I finished reading my book and then, once again, made my way to the coffee tent. I think by now this routine is no surprise to anyone 😊 

In the coffee tent, I chatted a bit with Bianca and Mitch, and just as I was about to leave, Gabi came in. I took another half hour to catch up with her—to hear how her research was going and what she’d been up to the last few days. I hadn’t seen her since Wednesday or so. Since she was the first person I met here at EBC, I’m always especially happy when we get to see each other again. reason 





 Sunday, April 27 – EBC

 Today was another rest day, which means no alarm clock. As usual, I lay awake in my sleeping bag for half an hour to 45 minutes before changing clothes inside it and finally peeling myself out. Breakfast is always at the same time, 8 a.m., but not everyone manages to be on time every day. About two weeks ago, I started ordering a thermos of black tea, which now reliably shows up five minutes after I arrive at the table. That way, I can ensure I drink enough, since the thermos holds three liters of black tea. I usually manage to finish it by the time lunch is over, and then I don’t drink quite as much in the afternoon. Especially in the evening, I try to limit myself to two cups with dinner so that I don’t have to get up at night to pee. So far, that’s been working well—I’ve only had to get up twice at night, and I’ve been on the road for almost a month now. 

After breakfast, I headed to the kitchen tent again to ask for hot water to wash up. I’ve made it a habit to do a bit of laundry on sunny rest days. Not because it’s absolutely necessary, but because it gives me the feeling that I’m doing at least something useful while just sitting around. This time it was my pajama thermals’ turn—a thin pair of long merino underwear and a thin merino sweater, which I’ve worn every night since the first day of the trek. I also washed a set of underwear and a buff. People still smile at me when they see me washing in front of the kitchen tent, but since it’s more about the act than actual cleanliness, I still don’t try too hard while washing 😉. Then I packed my few things and hung them in the sun by my tent. Last time, Nathi gave me some clothespins, which I of course used again today—even though it was quite windless. 

Afterward, I turned to my laptop since I finally wanted to update the blog. Unfortunately, the battery only lasted about 1.5 hours, so I spent the rest of the time until lunch playing games on my phone. Even after lunch, that remained my main activity since I finished my seventh book yesterday and felt I needed a short reading break. I’m assuming I’ll have enough reading time during the upcoming rotation. I definitely haven’t regretted buying the Tolino two years ago—not for a second on these expeditions. 

As the afternoon went on, more and more clouds rolled in, and I even heard some distant thunder. It looks like the bad weather that was forecast is on its way. I already saw the first snowflakes falling outside, which I took as a sign to check on my laundry. Surprisingly, it was almost dry. Only the top was still a little damp, so I hung it in the tent roof, where the sun had warmed things up nicely. The rest I packed back into the designated bags, which serve as my improvised wardrobe. There’s one bag for tops, one for thick thermals, one for underwear, one for socks, and one for used socks. Then there’s an entertainment bag and three full snack bags, and by now I’m starting to wonder when I’m actually going to eat all that. Back home, it seemed like far too little. But here, the tables in the dining tent are full of food—you could practically eat 24/7 and there’d still be plenty left for others. 

Back in the dining tent, I decided there was still enough time to do one of the puzzles I brought. So I cleared a corner of the table and started on a unicorn puzzle with lots of dark colors and sparkles. I got it last summer from Raphael’s sister Daniela, and while the image isn’t exactly my favorite, I had the time so I left the timer off for once and fought my way through the pieces on the uneven tablecloth. During the 1.5 hours of puzzling, I also chatted a bit with Dipen about his goals and future. He’s doing an excellent job here, and at 26 years old, he still has many dreams he wants to chase. He came to base camp a few weeks ago with his father, uncle, and a friend of his father. The other three work for the same company but in a different kitchen tent (the Chinese kitchen). 

Two weeks ago, however, the father’s friend had a heart attack and was flown by helicopter to Kathmandu. Sadly, he didn’t survive, so the three others also flew to Kathmandu to attend the funeral. We didn’t hear anything about this while we were just sitting out our rest days. Dipen seems happy to have some family nearby, but he’s also looking forward to returning to Kathmandu and focusing on his future. He wants to travel the world and start by getting his trekking guide certification, which involves 26 days of theory in Kathmandu and another two weeks of fieldwork. His English is very good—much better than most of the kitchen crew’s—and I’m convinced he won’t be working in a kitchen for many more seasons. I really hope he achieves his goals soon. He’s a daily highlight, and I’m grateful I get to enjoy the fruits of his labor here. 

After finishing the puzzle, I headed over to the coffee tent for a hot chocolate. Unfortunately, there was no one I knew there this time, so I didn’t stay long. It was also quite full again, which increases the risk of catching something—more so than when the tent is empty. On the way back to the dining tent, I made a detour to my tent to start getting ready for the night once again: putting on thermals, packing toothbrush, toothpaste, and headlamp, emptying water bottles if needed, and bringing them along. 

In the dining tent, I had a good connection and was able to call Raphael for a bit, since the school holidays ended today and I wanted to know how things were going at home with the five little ones. I also finally managed to charge my laptop, since electricity only becomes available after 6 p.m., when the generators are turned on. For dinner, I had rice and vegetables, which I dutifully finished (empty plate no. 21?!). 

After that, I brushed my teeth, packed my seven things—including the bottles filled with hot water—and headed back to my tent. Since the Wi-Fi was still working great, I was able to call and wish my sister a happy birthday and chat with Seraina a bit too. But by 9 p.m., it was lights out—I didn’t want to be late for breakfast again. My final ritual before sleeping: put in my earplugs, slip on the eye mask, take off my down jacket and the layer underneath, and snuggle into the sleeping bag. 






Monday, April 28 – EBC

 According to the plan, today should be my last rest day before the rotation. I’m curious to see if everything will go according to plan. During the night, we got 10 cm of fresh snow, but it stayed fairly calm with little wind. I woke up right on time and heard the snow sliding off the tent roofs at irregular intervals. It took a few of these mini roof avalanches before I realized they weren’t real avalanches. As usual, I woke up too early and took advantage of the Wi-Fi. 

After that, I followed my evening routine—just in reverse: take off the thermals in the sleeping bag and put on my pants, then put on the sweater and down jacket, slip out of the sleeping bag, brush my hair, put on my hat and sunglasses, and head outside. On the way to the dining tent, I pass the pee tent, which of course I don't skip, and soon I’m sitting in the dining tent. That’s where I still am now—laptop plugged in, ready to send the blog to my sister. I also used the time to transfer the photos from my phone to the laptop, so at least the first batch is safely backed up. 

I assume Chirring and Gyalzen will show up sometime in the afternoon so we can pack everything we need for the rotation together. In the meantime, I’ve already prepared a small pharmacy bag and thought about what clothes I’ll need. 




Monday, April 28 – EBC - Part II

 I’m now back from my rotation and I don’t want to miss the opportunity to take you along with me for those three intense days. But first, let me tell you about the afternoon of last Monday. 

As expected, around 3 p.m., Chirring and Gyalzen showed up at my tent so we could go through what would be coming up the mountain with us and what wouldn’t. I had already done a pre-selection to keep things from taking too long. My previous expeditions definitely came in handy here, as I already knew about 99% of what I needed to pack. I was unsure about the extra clothing, since it gets even colder in the higher camps. Up there, you’re even less motivated to change clothes than you are here at EBC. Still, it can get very hot in the Western Cwm, and in that case you at least want to be able to take off sweaty clothes to let them dry. I also packed a big bag full of potential snacks, in case I didn’t like the food in the camps. I already don’t eat much at home, let alone on the mountain. But if you’re sitting in a tent all day because it’s too cold to go outside, a few snacks can be a welcome distraction from the boredom. 

The essentials included things like my air mattress, sleeping bag, and down suit—plus, for me, several pairs of socks, depending on whether we’d be in cold or hot weather while wearing the triple boots. I also packed my e-book reader, the Theos, and SPF 100 sunscreen. Once we had agreed on everything, Chirring and Gyalzen packed up what was already ready and put it in their backpacks. I went to the coffee tent one last time for a hot chocolate, but unfortunately didn’t run into anyone I knew. It seemed like everyone was already up on the mountain. The hot chocolate was still delicious, and the calm before the storm did me some good. I don’t remember what we had for dinner, but in any case, I tried—as always—to eat at least half of it. After that, I stayed in the dining tent until my phone was fully charged, and then I went to bed. Wake-up was at 1 a.m. for me—we wanted to head out at 2 a.m. the next day, and before that I needed to eat something to keep everyone happy. 

 Tuesday, April 29 – EBC to Camp 1 

I didn’t have much trouble falling asleep after dinner. Everything was ready, and I was so ready to finally move up to the higher camps. So, after the alarm went off, I got dressed, turned on my headlamp, and went to the dining tent, where, according to the plan, 3 liters of tea would be waiting for me. 

When I opened the zipper, I couldn’t quite believe what I was seeing: contrary to all the weather forecasts I had checked, there was 7 cm of fresh snow outside the tent. It was also windier than I had expected. My mind couldn’t quite process it, and as I peed, I wondered whether the snow would be a problem. The attempt to spot other headlamps in the Icefall was unsuccessful. 

In the dining tent, the promised thermoses were there, so I treated myself to a cup of black tea with cornflakes. I didn’t feel like having more at the moment. When a kitchen Sherpa came in, he asked me if I was going up today. As if I’d just casually be sitting in the dining tent at 1:20 a.m. eating cornflakes for fun. He said his brother was also going up today and that it would be dangerous. I only half-listened because I had good Wi-Fi and wanted to update my WhatsApp status. I forgot it was still evening back home, so I quickly answered a few messages. Chirring and Gyalzen soon appeared as well and also had some tea. 

I went back to the tent to put on my boots and grab my packed backpack. Lastly, I filled my two water bottles with hot water and added a bit of flavor. At 2:20 a.m., we were ready to set off—which here means first circling the Puja shrine once more to ask for a safe passage. 

In the snowfall, we made our way toward the glacier and from there to the Crampon Point. This time it took five minutes longer—we had a long way ahead of us and didn’t need to rush. In the distant Icefall, I could at least now see a few headlamps, which reassured me that we weren’t the only ones out despite the fresh snow and ongoing snowfall. 

At Crampon Point, we had one last pee break, and just as we were putting on our crampons, five Sherpas appeared from the Icefall. They were on their way back to Base Camp, and I didn’t find out what their five-minute discussion with Chirring and Gyalzen was about. Honestly, I didn’t want to ask too much—like whether it was a dumb idea to be heading up now. I simply thought: they’ve just come down through the entire Icefall, and going down in snow is usually harder than going up. So it should be fine for us to climb today. 

And so we began our way along the now familiar route. The ropes were clearly visible, and the sections where we’d had to walk on bare rock last time were now much easier to traverse on snow. I kept glancing back to see if anyone was following us, but I never saw any other headlamps. 

Chirring led us stoically from anchor to anchor, while swirling snow still whipped around our faces. I wasn’t sure if my chin was frozen—I kept having to pull down my buff for a few seconds to breathe properly, and it was damp from my breath. For a while, I fixated on the question: can a chin actually freeze? I couldn’t really come up with an answer. 

The beam of my headlamp, though, stayed focused on the path, which remained clearly visible the whole time. At first, we passed 2–3 Sherpas coming down, who didn’t say much and descended purposefully. 

After just under 3 hours, we reached the spot where we had turned back last time. Now, a new rope clearly pointed into the unknown. I told Chirring and Gyalzen that we could turn back if it seemed too dangerous. After all, I still didn’t see a single other headlamp either above or below us—we were completely alone in an Icefall that, in theory, should have been teeming with people. The two just gave a brief “no” and asked if my fingers were still warm enough. 

 

Every half hour, we took a short break to drink, or if I needed to change my gloves, we’d stop briefly as well. But since it was windy—and quickly got cold—we tried to keep moving as steadily as possible. I tackled the uphill sections slowly but steadily. On flat stretches or descents, I moved at a reasonably normal pace. 

I noticed the towering seracs beside me but didn’t give them too much attention. They’re there whether you like it or not, and you can’t really tell by looking at them whether they’re dangerous or not. In any case, they were beautiful. Every time I wanted to take a photo, I asked the two guys if it was okay, and most of the time they nodded—they knew it would only take a moment before I was ready to continue. 

The route mostly led uphill, sometimes down again, across snow bridges and crevasses. Occasionally, there was a ladder, but often the only option was to jump over the crevasse. Still, I never felt total panic. The big jumps did take courage, but the higher I climbed, the less I was willing to let a glacier crevasse dictate when I should stop. One huge jump I only dared to make after Chirring counted me down—and even then, only because he said I’d probably slide forward on my stomach (which, thankfully, didn’t happen). 

The long ladder I had seen on social media, stretching horizontally across a crevasse, was gone—it was now leaned steeply against a wall, so you could simply climb it like at home. That’s much easier for me than the horizontal ones where you also have to look down—right into the crevasse—to figure out where to place your boots. 

There were also spots where you stood on a ridge, saw the ropes to the left that you were supposed to climb, but the fixed ropes led off to the right. These little detours that add more vertical meters are always a mental challenge. Still, the longer you’re on the move, the more you notice how you’re climbing higher and higher through the Icefall. 

From Base Camp, the route looks like a giant question mark. You start off to the right, then curve left around a rock formation, and ascend again on the right side. From there, it zigzags toward the left, and you exit the actual Icefall roughly in the upper third. At that point, all that stands between you and Camp 1 are countless glacier crevasses—some to be jumped over, others crossed like sand dunes: up and down, up and down. 

I only realized this when I was standing on one of these “sand dunes” and spotted a lone tent behind a ridge. I thought, “That must be Camp 1,” and sure enough, ten minutes later we arrived at the tent. The camp itself was visible just ahead, seemingly only five minutes away. But in between were six steep dunes—each one only becoming visible once you’d climbed the previous (and supposedly final) one. 

It took a full 35 minutes before we finally stood in the camp. I know the Icefall dictates the route, but honestly, no one needs six of these “little bastard hills” after already spending six hours in the Icefall. 

 

Well then, we reached Camp 1 after 6.5 hours, and the first thing I did was head into the small dining tent, where hot tea was being served. I drank a cup and chatted with my friends whom I had been missing back at Base Camp. By the way, the tent was very similar to Camp 1 at Manaslu: in the middle, a table had been carved out of snow and ice, and around it, a seating platform also made of snow and ice. 

The others had all come up the day before, and aside from Bianca and Paul, everyone was getting ready to move on, since they were heading to Camp 2 that day. Bianca had had to empty her stomach shortly before starting out yesterday, and apparently Paul caught the bug either on the way through the Icefall or once in Camp 1. He slowed down more and more throughout the Icefall, and in the end it took them almost 10 hours to reach Camp 1. He spent most of his time lying in the tent. Bianca, on the other hand, was a bit bored, since Camp 1 is really used mainly as a stopover, and no one stays there longer than one night unless forced to by health issues. 

We used the time to keep each other entertained and watched the others pack their gear and slowly head off toward Camp 2. From the dining tent, you could see the first part of the route quite well, and it looked relatively flat and pleasant. Also, it’s only a 400-meter climb to Camp 2, crossing directly through the Western Cwm. 

After a while, I went looking for my backpack and asked Gyalzen. He and Chirring had meanwhile shoveled out a large platform with other Sherpas and pitched tents on it. They had already prepared one of those tents for me—meaning they had inflated my air mattress, laid out my sleeping bag, and placed my clothes bag and down suit ready for use. My backpack was already inside the tent too, so all I had to do was flop down inside. I hadn’t expected that kind of service and am really grateful to both of them for this “princess service.” 

So I lay down in my tent, changed clothes, and before long it got quite hot inside. The sun was shining, and the platform had been strategically placed in a relatively wind-sheltered spot. So there I was, barefoot and just wearing thermals and a T-shirt in my tent, trying to eat snacks regularly and empty my water bottles. Meanwhile, Chirring and Gyalzen started digging a new toilet that would be a bit better hidden than the one we’d had so far. 

 

From the dining tent, you had a clear view of everything—nothing could be hidden, no matter how hard you tried. You did have to accept a bit of an elevation gain to get to the new toilet, but the risk of being seen—or having your bare backside spotted—was a hundred times lower. 

In the afternoon, I also practiced my summit puzzle a few times while wearing gloves, only to find out how difficult it actually is. And I wasn’t even using the thick gloves, just my very thin ones. We’ll see if this whole puzzling-on-the-summit-of-Everest idea works out. At the moment, it doesn’t seem all that feasible to me. 

For dinner, I was served a large portion of plain white rice, and I tried to eat as much of it as I could with the help of Aromat seasoning. The problem is that by the time the rice reaches me, it’s usually already quite cold, mushy, and flavorless. The Aromat helps only a little to make it somewhat edible. Luckily, I’d already eaten enough nuts, so—even though I felt a bit guilty—I could leave half of it uneaten without worry. 

Once the sun disappeared behind the mountains, it got very cold very quickly, and I put on every piece of useful clothing I had. I only left the tent to pee, and during those moments I enjoyed the view of the Western Cwm and the surrounding mountains for a few minutes. I read until it got dark and then tried to sleep. Unfortunately, I had only put on thin socks for sleeping, so I got pretty cold during the night. I woke up often, and every time I changed positions, my sleeping bag would slip off the air mattress. It took quite a bit of effort each time to find a decent and somewhat warm sleeping position again. Plus, the night feels endlessly long when you’ve already been lying in your sleeping bag since 5 p.m. 😉 

Wednesday, April 30th – Camp 1 to Camp 2 

I didn’t exactly wake up exhausted on Wednesday, but I certainly didn’t feel as great as I usually do in Basecamp. The hot Nalgene bottles had already cooled down to body temperature, and no matter how I turned, the sleeping bag was cold somewhere. I distracted myself by fiddling around on my phone. Unfortunately, my bladder also forced me out of the tent, and since we wanted to leave fairly early anyway, I didn’t torture myself too much. I slipped into my clothes inside the sleeping bag and got up. Since I still had to pack everything inside the tent, I just slipped into the outer shoes of my boots and went to pee. It gets light here very early, even though the sun hides behind the mountains, which helps you wake up early. After peeing, I packed everything that belonged in my backpack, put the sleeping bag into its stuff sack, and folded the air mattress so it would fit into its sack. Everything that Chirring and Gyalzen had already carried to Camp 1, I laid out in the tent, and the rest was already packed in my backpack. Finally, I put on my boots, this time with the inner shoes already snugly laced up for the way to Camp 2. Afterward, I took my backpack outside and went to the dining tent. Bianca and Paul were already sitting there, and they would also be heading to Camp 2 today. I got a bowl of a few cornflakes and drank half a liter of black tea. Chirring and Gyalzen still had to eat breakfast and pack their backpacks, so I didn’t need to rush. Bianca and Paul, meanwhile, had already finished their breakfast and were in the process of putting on their climbing harnesses and crampons. Everything here takes a little more time, and since you know that, you’re usually already putting on these important tools before the planned departure time. The goal for Bianca’s group and for us was to cover as much of the route as possible before the sun would shine into the Cwm. It’s known that the Cwm turns into an oven within minutes, and you get roasted like a chicken while making your way to Camp 2. In such situations, I feel drained and lose all my energy, another reason for me to wear fewer warm clothes today, so I wouldn’t sweat too much. As a result, I froze a little while sitting on the snow in the dining tent, shoveling my few spoonfuls of cornflakes into me. 

Bianca and Paul left the camp about half to three-quarters of an hour before me, and while I was waiting, I just continued drinking black tea. The more I drank now, the better I would handle the altitude change. When my guys were ready, we could finally get going, and a glance at the clock told me it was only 8 a.m. The path gradually climbs to the right, passing Camp 1 and heading toward the end of the valley. Often, there is no rope to guide you, especially if there’s too much snow. However, flags from the fixing team guide the way through the Cwm. It first winds along the right side of the mountain and then slowly changes sides, because Camp 2 is located on the left side of the mountain, or more precisely, directly below the summit of Everest on the left side. Although you’re walking on the glacier the whole way, you encounter very few crevasses. You simply cross 2-3 smaller ones, and the 2-3 large ones are secured with fixed ropes and cross wider snow bridges. After about 50 minutes, we suddenly find ourselves in front of a 10-meter vertical wall. I’ve seen such scenes in various videos, but it was still a bit unexpected. The passage over this serac was secured with various ropes, so you didn’t have to wait too long. The Sherpas with large, heavy backpacks attached them to the ropes and scrambled up without their backpacks, while other Sherpas helped to pull the load up from above. I noticed Paul in the upper third of the vertical section, while Bianca was just getting ready to move upwards. I thought it would make a great video and wanted to take out my phone, which I had just used for a photo. But Bianca was so fast that I didn’t even have a second to film. I have no idea how out of breath she was at the top because moving quickly at this altitude is almost impossible for regular people like us, and she was really, really fast at getting to the top. I took a little more time for myself. When I face vertical sections, I always try to clip in quickly and then climb at a steady pace. In the middle, I usually take a short break to catch my breath, and then continue for the second half. I always try to ignore the fact that people may be waiting for me down below, because rushing really doesn’t help. It would just make me more out of breath and I would need an even longer break on the wall. When I finally reach the top, I’m so out of breath that I’m always relieved when Chirring takes the Jumar off me. 

I had always clipped the safety line myself until now, even though it seemed almost impossible to do so in those few seconds. Above the vertical section, there was a large area where everyone could stop to catch their breath. I was glad when Gyalzen said we would take a short break here. It also seemed that the area at Crampon Point was designated for the Sherpas. Above that area, I saw almost no more porters with crampons, and everywhere on the plateau, there were piles of climbing harnesses and crampons scattered around. After our break, we continued along the route, and shortly afterward, we overtook Bianca and Paul, who was still not fully recovered. He needed quite a few breaks, and his pace was very slow. We were also incredibly lucky with the weather. By now, more than an hour had passed, and the Western Cwm was overcast, so the sun couldn’t roast us. It was the perfect temperature to walk without a down jacket, but not too hot to start sweating. Still, the clouds were high enough that we could enjoy a little view of the mountains. We could also see the tents of Camp 2 in the distance from time to time, and they didn’t seem very far away. The path now led diagonally toward the left side of the Cwm, and it was sometimes almost flat and sometimes a little steeper. Paul said he could remember from his last ascent that there was a very long hill leading directly to Camp 2. For me, it did feel like a long hill, but it wasn’t as steep as I had expected. After about 2.5 hours, we reached the lower end of Camp 2. As always on Everest, 14peaks had set up the highest and almost last camp. This meant I still had to walk another 40 minutes before reaching our camp. But first, we made one last stop, where we also took off our crampons, as the path led over stones, and it was easier to manage without crampons. I actually thought I could make the way in 30 minutes, but it was steeper than it had seemed from below, and our camp was not even visible from the bottom. I thought we would be sharing a camp with Seven Summit Treks, like we did at Camp 1, so I aimed for their dining tent. However, Chirring kept telling me several times to just keep going, and eventually, I got a little frustrated because I couldn’t find the damn tent. I took the last 10 minutes in intervals, stopping a hundred times to search for the tent, which of course took more time. When I finally spotted it in my field of vision, it was only a few minutes away, and I was relieved that we had arrived. Although it was the shortest day of the rotation, as we arrived exactly after 3 hours, I still felt almost as tired as the day before when we were on the move for 6.5 hours. The last hill was just too long for my brain 😊 It seems like both the first day with the 6 waves and the second day with the final hill each end with a "pain-in-the-ass part." 

Since it was just before 11:30 AM, Chirring and Gyalzen sent me back to the dining tent, where I drank more black tea and had a bar. They took care of my tent again, and an hour later, the "princess service" was ready for me once more. I continued drinking my black tea outside and thought that I might quickly go down to the Seven Summit Treks Camp to chat with Bianca and Paul. That's when I saw Mitch with his Sherpa Gjelze and Kristin, who were just meeting, so I walked over to them. Kristin was on her way to the Lhotse Face to explore how much snow had accumulated there. Mitch and Gjelze were coming back from their acclimatization there and were heading down. Mitch had been struggling with hoarseness for several weeks, and now his voice was almost gone, and his throat was sore. They had decided that they would take the whole journey back to base camp today to give Mitch the recovery he deserved. They might even continue descending to speed up his recovery. Kristin asked me if I wanted to join them, but since I had just arrived an hour ago, I had to unfortunately decline. Let's see if I ever get the chance to hike a mountain with Kristin in my life… I said goodbye to the three of them and walked back to my camp. There, I asked Chirring if it was okay for me to quickly stop by Bianca and Paul to check if they were doing okay. They allowed me 30 minutes since lunch was about to be served. I walked the 2 minutes down that had taken me almost 10 minutes just 2 hours ago and arrived just in time to hug Bianca as she arrived. Paul followed a few meters behind her, looking even more tired than he had when I passed them on the glacier. Since they were both relieved to have arrived and I knew from experience that one isn’t very chatty in that moment, I left them to settle in and returned to my camp. I set myself up in my tent and stayed there for a few hours. I tried to nap a little, played on my phone, and continued reading my book, as it was still cloudy outside, and it had started snowing again. At 4:30 PM, the weather outside looked much friendlier, and since I had to use the bathroom again anyway, I took it as an opportunity to crawl out of my sleeping bag and put on my down pants. In the sun, it was so pleasantly warm, and the view in front of me was so much better than just a few hours earlier. 

When the kitchen crew spotted me outside, they asked if I wanted some soup before dinner. I declined but asked if they could perhaps make a little popcorn for me. It didn’t take half an hour, and soon I had a basket of warm popcorn in my hands. Sitting outside in front of the Lhotse Face on a folding chair, munching on the popcorn, made up for all the years I had waited for this view. I think I sat there for over an hour, simply gazing at this magnificent ice wall, which I hope to eventually climb. The weather was good to us—the sun shone on the wall in all its glory. To my left stands Mount Everest, another steep rock face that I could also only admire. I had waited so long to see this mountain, and now I’m sitting right in front of it, unable to get enough of it. I have no idea what the kitchen crew thought when they saw me sitting there, much like in a movie theater when you’re watching a film and eating popcorn. Except my "movie" was a sheer rock wall and the icy Lhotse Face, and yet I am indescribably happy about it. 

I don’t know how you all feel reading this, but this sight is still beyond my comprehension (and this is four days later). I was actually sitting right in front of Everest. Right in front of it, literally and truly. In a straight line, the summit is probably still vertically 2.5 kilometers away from me. What a difference from the more than 6000 kilometers and 28 years I’ve waited to be this close to my mountain of destiny. Far away now is the frustration of the last hill to get to the end of Camp 2, which I was still carrying with me this morning. 

 

I stayed outside until the sun lost its strength behind the advancing veil of clouds, and I started to feel a little cold. I told the kitchen crew that I wouldn’t need dinner anymore, apart from the popcorn. They looked a bit disappointed because they had already cooked something for the three Chinese guys in the dining tent. But when I had to go inside briefly to get toilet paper, the smell almost made me nauseous, and I was very glad to get back outside quickly. After peeing, my tent was the best place to wait out the night. I learned from the first night in the Cwm and put on my warm socks for the night. I also asked Chirring to fill my warming bottles only after their dinner, so I might have some warmth to last longer through the night. Since the three of us felt great, we decided before heading to our tents that we would cancel the rest day for tomorrow and make an attempt to reach Camp 3. We planned to have breakfast at 7 a.m. and leave at 8 a.m. 

Thursday, May 1 – Camp 2 – Touch Camp 3 

My alarm went off at 6:45 am, since this time I didn’t have to pack up my tent again. I had already packed the important things the evening before, so in the morning I didn’t have to make too many unnecessary movements in the cold. After peeing, I took my backpack out of the tent into the dining tent and first put on my thick boots. Then I went into the kitchen tent, where I was warmly welcomed and immediately handed a cup of tea. The crew also wanted to know if I wanted noodle soup for breakfast. Just the thought of it made it hard for me to continue drinking my tea. However, since I couldn’t leave the tent without eating, busy hands stretched a package of cookies toward my face. I saw the packaging and knew they were chocolate cookies, so I bravely took one. In the morning, eating is always especially difficult for me because I usually don’t eat at home until around noon. That means the challenge is greatest in the morning. The chocolate cookies were a good thing, and I managed to eat 5 of them over the next half hour, along with about 4 cups of tea. Meanwhile, Chirring and Gyalzen also showed up, but both complained of headaches. Since we weren’t in a hurry, I told them that, despite the different plan, we could take a rest day today. They had carried 25 kg each around for the past two days, so it was almost obvious to me that their bodies would welcome a break. But they said they were fine and just needed breakfast. I suggested that we would decide after breakfast whether we would rest or ascend to Camp 3. 

Now, I was able to witness firsthand in the kitchen tent the hustle and bustle as numerous people tried to melt useful water and get the stove running better. It seemed that one of the Nepali was responsible for cooking breakfast, but many hands also contributed. After about 20 minutes, noodles and soups were ladled into bowls and distributed to all the other Nepali. They slurped the contents of their bowls in seconds and went outside to clean them by hand. Once again, Chirring and Gyalzen refused the rest day, and we met outside to attach our crampons for our adventure. By now, two people were already on the route toward Camp 3, luckily breaking trail through the snow that had fallen during the night. At the beginning, there was still no rope set up, so we had to navigate using the flags. The trail initially wound quite flatly or with very little incline along the crevasses towards the Lhotse Face. We approached the two trailbreakers slowly but steadily, and the closer we got, the slower they seemed. When we were already in sight, I discovered that it was a Sherpa with his client on the short rope. 

The short rope is actually not necessary here, unless the guide wants the client to keep up with the pace to some extent. Behind us were about 10 other people, likely with the same plan as ours. After 1.5 hours, we had caught up with the two people ahead of us, and all that lay ahead was a new snowfield, partially interrupted by flags. I hesitated to let Chirring go into the fresh snow, as I knew we were still on a glacier and at any moment there could be a crevasse lurking somewhere. However, we had no other choice but to take the lead. Gyalzen reassured me that it would be fine, and I just had to trust that the fixing team had marked any crevasses along the route. So, I followed Chirring at a 5-meter distance, making my way up the increasingly steep hill towards the bergschrund. It took about half an hour before we reached the end of the hill, where a beautiful traverse appeared before us, secured by orange ropes in a glacier crevasse. First, you have to jumare up about 5 meters, then traverse another 5 meters, during which your feet have no real hold. That is, under all the snow, there is no clear place to place your feet, or at least a few spikes of your crampons. After that, you need to jumare up another 7 meters before you reach the base of the Lhotse Face. This spot will definitely be interesting when the mountain fills up, and even people with a bit less experience with the equipment will have to get through here. I already dread what kind of conflicts could arise if someone gets stuck, because the traverse is not easy, and below you, there is a wonderfully deep glacier crevasse. I had to control myself quite a bit, stopping 2-3 times to catch my breath before I could continue. But I did so with the full awareness that no one was waiting behind me. I have no idea how I will react if people are waiting behind me and others above me also want to descend. Then you’re stuck in the middle of the traverse, panicking, and can’t move anymore… We’ll see... 

But back to the present. Now I am at the foot of the Lhotse Face, and all I see are parts of orange ropes in the middle of an endless wall. Since we are the first ones, and there was some fresh snow in the past two days, the ropes were partially covered in snow. Additionally, the underlying ground was hidden under the deep snow, so you never knew if the next step would hold, if you would slip a bit, or if there was an ice plate beneath. Chirring, as usual, went ahead and stopped every 10 steps to give me time to follow him. Unfortunately, the steps he made were a bit too big for me. At times, I was reminded of Ama Dablam, but I never once thought about turning back. 

 

I absolutely wanted to get over 7000m today. Partly because I had never been above that limit without oxygen, and partly because I wanted to prove to Everest that I was taking my rotation seriously. And for me, Camp 3 was just part of that. The individual steps were exhausting, and the many breaks somehow also felt tiresome. Still, I was always glad when I could catch my breath for a minute. I looked up too often to see how much further it was, and even though I noticed the slow progress, I wondered how it would be during the summit rotation. On that rotation, I would have to ascend from Camp 2 to Camp 3 in one day, and then continue to Camp 4 the next. And that, even though Camp 3 isn't halfway up the Lhotse Face, meaning the second day would involve even more uphill climbing. But I tried to push those thoughts away and focus on the fact that I was on the Lhotse Face, just a heartbeat away from the summit, compared to where I had come from. I think if I had told the guys that I wanted to turn back, they would have let me, so it was in my hands how high I wanted to go. Somehow, the higher we got, the less I wanted to turn back, because then all the effort would have been almost in vain. Maybe that's what kept me going, and just below Camp 3, about 30 minutes below it, there was a small traverse where it wasn't just steeply uphill. From there on, it was 100% clear that we were going all the way to Camp 3, and I was relieved when we finally reached the spot where 14peaks had set up camp. Just above, there were the six tents that had been set up, but we didn't go those last 15 meters. A glance at the watch showed me that it had taken me 2 hours since the narrow spot at the foot of the Lhotse Face. So, we had been on the way for exactly 4 hours to reach Camp 3. Phunuru and Allan had predicted almost 4 weeks ago that I would be fit enough to make it to Camp 3 in four hours. The fact that it took me exactly that long, even though I felt so slow, really surprised me. I also didn't feel as tired as I had expected after the 2 hours in the fresh snow. Since the two guys were still suffering from headaches, we only had a quick drink and then prepared for the descent. In the meantime, the weather had turned and fresh snow started to fall. So, we put on an extra layer, and I had them explain to me again how to best handle the rappel device, so it wouldn’t accidentally fall off my harness. I had only used it once a few years ago, as I usually prefer the ATC. But since some ropes here are either too frozen or too thick for the ATC, we decided to use the rappel device on the mountain. I gladly accepted the tips from the two of them and began the first rappel. Ironically, it only took us about 30 minutes to descend to the foot of the face. The painstakingly gained altitude seemed to rush by, and since there weren't many anchors, we didn't have to unclip that often. Unfortunately, my harness was tightening around my stomach a bit, so I had to take a short break while rappelling. It felt as though I was about to vomit. But after a brief relief, I was fine again for a few minutes. On the way down, we crossed paths with a guide with Westerlin, who was using oxygen, and three Sherpas with large backpacks. 

 

When we arrived back at the traverse that had scared me during the ascent, I realized that you can't tell from above whether someone is stuck in the traverse or not. Calling out doesn't really work either, as the echo doesn't carry around the corner. So, you have to pull on the rope and hope that the traverse is clear before you clip in. Honestly, I'm not sure if there are many opportunities to re-anchor if you're rappelling down while someone else is ascending. I definitely don't look forward to passing this spot a second and third time. I just hope that there will be few people on the mountain and that we'll have some luck when descending from my two summits at this point. Once again, I took a deep breath and made it through the traverse, feeling relieved when we were finally past it. Below that spot, we met Kristin, who—once again alone—was on her way for a night in Camp 3. She asked us a bit about the condition of the face and whether anyone above her was still on the route. She knew that the three Sherpas were climbing with the goal of setting up a few tents and then returning to Camp 2. So, she would be spending the night up there all alone. I took the opportunity and finally asked her for a photo, as I want to remember for the next 10 years that I was at my dream mountain at the same time as a legend. She agreed, and I even offered her one of the Theos to keep her company in Camp 3, but she politely declined and instead took some mental unicorn power with her. We continued the rest of the way to Camp 2 and, just one hour after leaving Camp 3, we were back in our camp. The snowstorm had gotten a little stronger, so I immediately retreated to my tent. Chirring knew exactly what I needed, and 10 minutes later I was already stocked with black tea and popcorn. Once again, the weather behaved similarly to yesterday, and the later the day got, the more the sun appeared at the end of the Western Cwm. I couldn't resist sitting outside on the folding chair again today, just looking at the Lhotse Face. I know that after this expedition I’ll never come back here, and I want to soak up this entire environment so much that it almost hurts. 

The view is breathtaking, the upper part of Lhotse covered in snow. The rock face to my left is now mostly covered in snow as well, but you can still see the different rock layers beneath, flashing through. I’ve read about the geological structure of Everest a few times, but I still can’t remember it. I only know that the yellow band is named after the color of the rock, and that this band runs through the whole mountain and is visible from here as well. Of all the views of Everest, this one is my favorite so far, although I’m pretty sure I can’t see the summit from here. It looks somehow different, yet very similar to how it looks from the Khumbu Valley. Since it was getting cold outside and the sun was about to disappear behind the clouds again, I wanted to go back to my tent. However, Chirring suggested that I come to the kitchen tent instead, since it would be warmer there, and I hadn’t eaten anything yet. So, at 6 p.m., I ended up in the bustling kitchen tent. The Nepali didn’t quite understand why I was sitting there, even though it was a dining tent for us Westerners. But there were three Russian women sitting there, who were coughing a little—double the reason not to sit in there. I enjoyed the hour in the kitchen tent, as the view offered there is something not everyone gets to experience. The kitchen can be described, in the best way, as rudimentary. There are three gas canisters in the middle of the room, each with a large bowl of ice and/or water sitting on top. Then, as a room divider, there is a small table made from ice, with flat stones placed on it. This is where the head cook prepares the meals, but there are also various bowls with spices, etc. Next to it, a part is covered with a wooden board, on which thermoses are placed, filled with either milk tea, black tea, or hot water. The Sherpas are allowed to help themselves, and my cup was also refilled regularly. Since the kitchen crew kept trying to convince me to eat the Dal Baht that was cooked for the Nepali, but I wasn’t hungry at all, I eventually decided to ask for a bowl of cornflakes. They wouldn’t let me leave the tent without eating something, and even though the food smelled very good, I couldn’t bring myself to eat any of it. Even the few spoonfuls of cornflakes took a lot of effort and time. At around 7 p.m., I had my bottles filled with hot water, went to the bathroom again, and then snuggled into my sleeping bag for the last night in camp. I had arranged with the guys that we would leave at 5:30 a.m. the next morning to head straight back to Basecamp. So the night would be rather short, but that was perfectly fine with me. 

Friday, May 2 – Camp 2 to Base Camp 

I couldn’t sleep as well this night as I had in Base Camp, but I think I managed to get a few hours of sleep. Since I had to pack up everything in my tent again, I let myself be woken up by my alarm at 4:45 am. The first thing I did was go to the bathroom, and I took my backpack with me to the dining tent, where I had already packed everything possible. On the way, I ran into Kristin again. She hadn’t slept much during the night, but she felt good. Since she also planned to go to Base Camp today, she had left early from 7000m and had already been on her way for an hour. After a short chat, I went back to the tent to pack up my sleeping bag and air mattress into their travel size. I also left my large snack bag there. These three things would stay at Camp 2 because, during our summit rotation, we would go directly from EBC to Camp 2, and I wouldn’t need them in EBC. 

In the meantime, Chirring had shown up and invited me into the kitchen tent again. There were thermoses with hot beverages ready, and once again, I woke up with black tea. With even less hunger than yesterday, I managed to eat only 2 cookies this time, but I drank 2-3 cups of tea. Honestly, I don’t know if Chirring and Gyalzen ate anything for breakfast; there was nothing prepared for them, but I saw Chirring nibbling on a chocolate cookie while I put on my climbing harness. This time, Gyalzen was responsible for packing up and securing my sleeping bag and other things. 

I assume he put everything into a rice sack labeled for us and placed it next to the oxygen bottles that had already been carried up for me, beside the dining tent. We didn't put on our crampons yet, because we wanted to walk down the first steep hill to the lower Camp 2 without them. Right on time at 5:30 am, we set off. We set quite a fast pace, but after just a few minutes, we were overtaken by a few Sherpas who seemed to be sprinting down the hill. However, I wanted to be careful with my steps, as an injury at this point would be even more unfortunate than in the last few months. Once we reached the lower end of the camp, the rocks were no longer in the way, and we were able to continue at a similar pace to the Sherpas in front of us. Finally, I was back in my hiking rhythm, and it felt amazing to feel that way without being too out of breath. The atmosphere in the Western Cwm was also unique. We crossed only Sherpas, the air was crystal clear, and the sky was that typical Nepalese blue. The view of Pumori and the others was spectacular, and the valley seemed to radiate a stillness that I hadn’t noticed on the way up two days ago. I had to stop several times to capture the scene with my iPhone, but I doubt I could really preserve the atmosphere that way. I definitely enjoyed every single second we spent in this small high plateau. Almost 30 minutes after setting off, we stood on the platform above the vertical crevasse, and we put on our crampons. The vertical section wasn’t very crowded, so we were able to rappel down and continue on our way in peace. Another 25 minutes later, we had already arrived at Camp 1. Gyalzen asked me if I needed a break, but I felt good and was slowly craving Base Camp again, so I was fine with continuing. We let a group of Sherpas, who were also accompanied by Kristin, go ahead. They set a brutal pace, and since I remembered the wonderfully steep 6 waves waiting for us at the beginning, we were happy to let them pass. I took the waves very slowly because, even though I had spent a few minutes at 7000m, we were still at 6066m, and breathing up here is just harder. After the waves, I was able to enjoy the path much more. At first, we crossed only a few Sherpas, and after about 100 meters of ascent, we encountered our first little delay. I knew that I probably wouldn’t have the luck to have a completely empty Icefall in front of me again, but seeing about 25-30 people was still somehow unexpected. The spot was just a short ladder that needed to be crossed, a typical one-way section. Fortunately, there was a nice Sherpa below the ladder who recognized Chirring, and he let us go ahead. Probably, Chirring had told him while waiting that I wasn’t too clumsy and that the wait would be short. In any case, we were already on the ladder after maybe 6 minutes of waiting, and then passed all the waiting people to continue our descent. The overtaking was smooth because it was a wide section. Just a few minutes later, it wouldn’t have been that easy anymore.
 We encountered another small group at the first technical spot below the ladder. We let two Sherpas pass, then rappelled into a crevasse and climbed up the other side. When we were at the bottom of the crevasse, a few Indian Army personnel were already rappelling at our climbing spot, so we had to wait briefly there as well. Since new Indians were already ready at the top to rappel down, we didn’t waste time and climbed ahead of them. I didn’t want to make them wait too long, so I picked up the pace, but of course, I regretted it halfway through; however, I couldn’t stop at that point. Once we reached the top, I took a 5-minute breather. 

These two short delays were, however, the only events on the way back that showed that some people still want to climb Everest this year. We continued to cross paths with individuals, but always at well-visible and safe spots, allowing us to descend at our own pace. After 2.5 hours, we reached the Crampon Point again. The last 20 minutes were really warm, and I had to take off layers twice to avoid sweating. We had made it out of the Icefall before the sun hit it, which is a major safety factor and also made me a bit proud, as we were almost down in Sherpa time. We took off our crampons and continued toward Base Camp. The sun was already shining strongly here, so I quickly started to feel hot. Since we were so close to the goal, I didn’t want to change again, and I couldn’t get my hot feet out of the boots until we reached the tent. So, I endured the last 15 minutes, trying desperately not to think about the fact that next time I would walk through here in the opposite direction, hopefully with 2 summits in hand, satisfied but very tired. Almost unbelievable for me, but still a goal that is irresistibly approaching. I took the last steep meters into camp very slowly, and at the entrance, I thanked Chirring and Gyalzen. I then continued to the Puja shrine to thank for the successful rotation and then made my way to the tent. On the way, I ran into Jo, who asked me a bit about the mountain. She couldn’t wait to finally go through the Icefall, and it was planned for her to depart that night. I went back to my tent and could finally, finally take off the shoes in which my feet had been cooking. After that, I changed, sat down on my bed in the tent, and delivered the good news to my family that I was safely back. I enjoyed the quiet of the hour and spent the entire morning in my tent. I read the news, answered text messages, ate some snacks, or just sat there, happy with how well everything had been going in the last few days. At 12:30, I went to the kitchen tent to inform the crew that I was back. I also wanted to ask if they could make fries with fried eggs for me. Then I sat in the dining tent and drank tea until the food came. Unfortunately, they hadn’t quite understood me, so the requested meal didn’t arrive. Since I now really had to eat as much as I could, I asked again for fries with fried eggs, which I then got with a little delay. In the afternoon, I mostly sat in the dining tent to answer the many messages and go through my photos. I actually wanted to shower as well, but since the weather changed in the afternoon, I decided to skip it. For dinner, I wanted the same again, but once again, it didn’t work out. I did get fried eggs, but with spaghetti and two fried potatoes. Luckily, I was able to pass on the spaghetti, and after eating, I clarified with the kitchen crew that, from now on, I would like fries with fried eggs. After dinner, I read a little in my book, then went to bed soon because the last few nights had really worn me out. 

Saturday, May 3 – EBC 

I had a wonderful sleep that night and woke up at 6 am as usual in Base Camp. I then enjoyed the warmth of my sleeping bag and played around a bit on my phone. By 8 am, I was already in the dining tent, where I learned that others had pushed breakfast time back by half an hour. It would have been nice to know that earlier, but I used the time to read some more. After breakfast, it was still wonderfully sunny and windless, so I took advantage of the moment and enjoyed the shower I had planned yesterday. The air was almost not cold, and it was the best shower experience I had so far in Base Camp. I almost had to laugh when I realized that this was only my fourth shower since I left Kathmandu, and it had already been five weeks. Afterward, I finally took out my laptop and began writing about my experiences from the rotation. Since I was being quite thorough, time passed quickly, and before I knew it, the laptop battery was already dead. Less than 15 minutes later, it was lunchtime, so it didn’t bother me much. In the afternoon, I mostly played on my phone or chatted a bit with Dr. Berus or Alfredo, who oversee the medical care for Seven Summit Trek and 14Peaks. I also took advantage of the good Wi-Fi to have another video call with Raphael. We had a one-hour video call without interruption, so I now know what our five Schnüsis (a term of endearment) and he look like. He seems to be enjoying his time without his girlfriend at home, and I’m really happy about that. Even though I’m also looking forward to being back home, and for life to continue normally. 

By now, the kitchen crew had understood that I wanted to eat the same thing at every meal, so at 6:30 pm, after the hot towel before dinner, a plate with 2 fried eggs and fries arrived. The hot towel will especially be familiar to the regular readers of the Manaslu blog. Right before dinner, Pasang always appears with a pan, where a hot washcloth waits for everyone. It’s soaked with a little eucalyptus, making it a perfect warm refreshment before going to bed. The towel is too hot at first, and every day I try to catch the perfect moment to bury my face in it and let the heat sink into my body before it cools down. Shortly after this ritual, dinner appears, along with a small bowl of fruit.
 Today, I wanted to finish my book, so I stayed a little longer in the dining tent after dinner. But when everyone else had disappeared, I made my way back to my tent because Dipen’s instruction is always to work until the dining tent is empty. I didn’t want to drag it out artificially, because once the Russians were back, the evenings would become endless, and I wanted to give Dipen early evenings until then.So I read a little more in my tent until I got too tired. 

Sunday, May 4 – EBC 

Today is already my second rest day since my rotation. Yesterday afternoon, Gyalzen came by to warn me that we wouldn’t be going on our summit rotation before May 12. The fixing team had gone to Base Camp for two days of rest, and bad weather was forecast for May 5–6. They had set off again this morning for Camp 2, but there’s a lot of fresh snow above Camp 3, and no one knows how long it will take until they’ve made their way up to the South Col. Val, who wants to summit Everest this year without oxygen, also left this morning, because once the South Col is fixed, he wants to spend at least one night up there. For me, this means I can prepare for at least 9 more rest days, and I don’t know exactly how I want to spend that time. On one hand, I think the Base Camp is good enough to stay here, but on the other hand, recovery would probably go better further down in the valley. For me, it only makes sense to leave Base Camp if I get a significant improvement out of it. Going just to Dingboche or Namche would be a small improvement compared to the effort it would take to make that move. I’d prefer to fly to Kathmandu by helicopter, sleep well there, have a pizza every day, treat myself to a massage, and then fly back after five days. Apart from the fact that it goes against the principles I set before the expedition to fly to Kathmandu, it’s also environmentally and financially ridiculous. Still, all the benefits are tempting, especially when I hear this morning that Bianca and Paul flew to Kathmandu yesterday because Paul is still sick. I admit, that makes me quite jealous, and my cravings and longings grew strongly after hearing that.I also now know that a flight to KTM costs around 1000 USD, so a 5-day "trip" to KTM would cost me about 2500 USD when you include the hotel, etc. Even though I could probably afford it with the currently ridiculously low exchange rate, it’s simply too much for me. So, I have to prepare myself to stay here in EBC for the next 7–9 days. I’m curious to see how well I manage that, especially now that I’ve updated most of the blog and already enjoyed my shower. I still have laundry that I can wash once the weather gets better. Right now, it’s very cloudy and cold. Then, I have 3 puzzles to work on, an idea for a creative project, and with the good Wi-Fi, I can also order more puzzles anytime 😊 Now I just need to find the motivation for all of it. Today, I moved to the coffee tent to write the blog, where I drank a hot chocolate almost every hour. That’s how time passed after lunch, and now I’m sitting in our dining tent, trying to use the time after dinner to send out the blog. 

 Monday/Tuesday, May 5th/6th – EBC

 Since not much is happening in Base Camp at the moment, I’m combining the last two days. On Monday, the weather was good in the morning and I had time (haha), so I attempted some hand-washing again. Dipen kept me company, and afterward, everything at least smelled like the lemon detergent I always use. When I was done, I hung everything over the lines that stretch between all the tents in our tent corridor. Luckily, there aren’t too many people here right now, so hopefully no one will get annoyed by the socks, pants, shirts, etc. Once I finished, it was time to enjoy the sun and head to the coffee tent. But I didn’t even make it inside—I met Mitch in front of the tent. He had been in Pangboche for a few days to recover and had just returned about an hour earlier via helicopter. On board with him was Adrianna Brownlee, co-founder of AGA Adventure and his partner for the expedition. Like all the other legends here at BC, she was very open and it was great to chat with her in peace. 

Since it was a bit too windy outside, we soon moved into the coffee tent to play some cards. Time passes much more quickly that way than just playing around on your phone alone. I didn’t miss lunch, and just before 1 p.m., we parted ways to eat in our respective dining tents. In the afternoon, I stayed in the dining tent a bit longer because the Mexicans had returned from their rotation and I wanted to hear how things had gone for them. It’s nice to have them back; I really missed having people around with a similar sense of humor. They also had a successful rotation and now feel ready. Afterward, we had a few more rounds of cards in the coffee tent. Mitch was back again, as was Ben, who’s also here with Seven Summit Treks. For dinner, I had my usual: fried eggs with fries. Let’s see how long it takes before I get tired of it... 

After dinner, I got ready for bed early, and this morning I was awakened by... silence. That’s when I knew I was probably up a bit earlier than usual. A look at the clock confirmed my suspicion—it was 5:42 a.m. So I turned over and slept another 1.5 hours until I heard the Indians outside. They had also returned from the mountain yesterday and were actually supposed to fly back to KTM yesterday. But since the weather didn’t cooperate, they had to spend another night here. The plan was for them to fly out at 6:30 a.m. Anyone doing the math on the extra 1.5 hours of sleep will realize that this plan also didn’t work out. I heard them talking, but no rotor noise. 

When I showed up for breakfast at 8:15, they were still sitting at the table, equally tired, hoping for a post-breakfast helicopter. As the weather improved, they finally got to leave about an hour later. The rest of us continued to enjoy our dining tent—by now it was warm as the clouds kept clearing. I took the Mexicans with me to the coffee tent for a change of scenery, where the usual suspects were present. After a short while, Rebekka suddenly showed up in our tent. Funnily enough, I had just told the others five minutes earlier that I wanted to visit her but wasn’t sure if she was already back from her rotation. I let her chat with Gabi first, but then joined them. It was a fun conversation that also included Ahmed—a Pakistani lawyer who is also with Seven Summit Treks. 

He’s only been in camp for three days and still has all of his acclimatization ahead of him. Unfortunately, we had to part ways again at lunchtime, because I didn’t want to miss my fries 😊
 I spent the afternoon outside in the sun—or rather in the dining tent, since two trekking groups had arrived in the coffee tent and were coughing too much for my liking. Juan-Pedro was testing his DJ skills in the dining tent, and the Russians—who had also returned from the mountain that morning—joined in enthusiastically. The idea was for everyone to pick their summit song, which is harder than it sounds. Of course, there were classics from AC/DC and Black Sabbath, but also more “Annemie-like” picks such as Don’t Stop Me Now by Queen. It was a cheerful late afternoon that did everyone good. 

Before that, I also made my mom and sister happy by calling them briefly. It seems the 5.5 weeks of Nepali cold haven’t (yet) done too much damage to my face. Dinner was once again fried eggs with fries and fruit for dessert—my power food here on the mountain. I still can’t think of a good alternative. My mom and sister had spaghetti Bolognese, which would be amazing here, though I’m not sure if Nathi would use the right kind of pasta. Maybe I’ll have to stop by the kitchen tent again and ask 😊 

 Thursday, May 8th

 This morning I tried something new. I woke up just before 6 a.m., as usual, and knew I’d have to pee within the next two hours. So I got out of my sleeping bag right away, went to the toilet, and then crawled back into the warmth. As a result, I didn’t have any real reason to get up—apart from breakfast—and almost came too late. I made it to my seat right at 8:30 a.m. We’ll see which morning routine I go with in the next few days. After breakfast—fried eggs with toast and fruit, once again—I just sat in the dining tent and fiddled with my phone. Since it got warm quite early today in our dining tent, I packed my things and sat down on the artificial grass in front of the coffee tent. Next to me sat Walle, a 74-year-old Romanian who lives in the US. He was being interviewed by Everest One because, if he summits successfully, he’ll become the oldest Romanian to stand on Everest. 

He had tried once before, ten years ago, but had to turn back due to a severe cough. Though he gave his lungs a few days of rest down in the valley, it didn’t help much and he had to give up. This time, to conserve his strength, he acclimatized in Chile and then flew into Base Camp via helicopter. He plans to summit without doing a traditional rotation. I wish him all the luck in the world, but I’m not entirely convinced he’s fit enough for what lies ahead. His guide Victor, from Peru, was at Annapurna before this and came straight to Everest already acclimatized. He takes great care of Walle and has a huge heart in general. We’ll see how far this unlikely duo gets 😊 They spend almost every afternoon playing chess against each other. 

I used the sunny time to listen to Walle and to compare my pre-expedition travel plan to reality. I probably wouldn’t make time for that at home, but here, I’ve got plenty of time. When it got too windy, I moved back into the warmer dining tent. You can feel how strong the sun is—it really heats up the air in the tent. After lunch, I went back to the coffee tent to read a bit, since my laptop dies after 10 minutes. At 4 p.m., a few of “my” people came and we played cards for almost two hours. This time, Ben and Andrej were back, and new additions Mukesh and Ahmed joined. 

Let me give you a quick intro to those four (since you don’t have much else to read but Base Camp stories 😊). Mukesh is 16, with a Japanese mother and a Nepali father who just happens to own a helicopter company. So if Mukesh gets bored or needs supplies, he’s got his own personal heli-taxi to take him anywhere in the Khumbu with a helipad. He just returned from Lukla yesterday and prefers chess over cards. Ahmed is from Pakistan but lives in London and is a lawyer. He and his wife already climbed an 8000er together, and she has soloed two more. Now it’s his turn to climb Everest, a year after his wife. He’s a great addition to our group and just got back from a rotation this morning, which he had to cut short at Camp 1 due to sunstroke. Now he has to rest and do a proper rotation again. He’s super smart and incredibly funny. 

Andrej is a Russian I met at Manaslu. He’s here with his wife—both mountain guides—and a client from Kyrgyzstan. Maybe some of you remember the traffic jam between Camp 2 and Camp 1 at Manaslu, where I got stuck. Andrej was right in front of me with his client and sweetened the wait with music, which I still appreciate. It’s always great to see him and Darya again, and if I ever make it to Mt. Elbrus, he’ll definitely be my go-to. Unexpectedly, he interviewed me two days ago—he’s planning to make a short documentary about the Everest expedition. His Instagram photos are already amazing, and I can’t wait to see the final product. 

Last but not least, there’s Ben—who, as I just learned yesterday, is an English submarine engineer. You should’ve seen our faces when we realized a Russian and an English submarine designer were sitting at the same table 😊 Only an Everest waiting period could write stories like that. Ben is usually in the coffee tent every day, and we often sit in silence, each writing in our journals. Like me, he’s pretty fed up with just sitting around. He misses his 2-year-old daughter terribly and said today that he plans to book his return flight to Manchester for May 18. As soon as he can, he’ll go up the mountain, and once he’s back, he’ll take a heli straight to Kathmandu. 

He flew from Manchester to Nepal on April 12 and could hardly believe it when I told him I arrived on March 31 and have been in Base Camp since April 11. That makes me think I’m actually holding up pretty well, considering I’ve already been in BC for a month. I hope Ben’s plan works out and I hope to be back in Base Camp on May 18 as well. My plan is not to fly out, but to trek—at least then the waiting would be over. Unless I get stuck in Lukla, worst-case scenario. In that case, I’d probably splurge on a heli to KTM, if they’re flying. I already know I don’t have the patience for another long wait in Lukla. That definitely won’t change in the next two weeks. 

But back to our fun little group. We’re all (except Ahmed, who just returned) eager to finally begin our summit rotation and distract ourselves with card games. Thankfully, it’s not a complicated game, so we can chat as we play. 

Around 6 p.m., we wrap it up—everyone has dinner at 6:30 and doesn’t want to be late. At lunch, I asked for spaghetti with tomato sauce for dinner, and sure enough, after the usual hot towels, spaghetti appeared on my plate. The tomato sauce was unfortunately very spicy, but Nathi smartly served it on the side so I could control the amount. I even went back for seconds, by which time most of the sunlight had disappeared. For dessert, I had a mini banana, which I topped with my Dutch hagelslag, creating a Nepali chocolate banana. 

While eating, I saw on Instagram that the fixing team had reached the summit of Lhotse—apparently, Everest summit is expected tomorrow. That would be the official go-ahead for all those waiting. I’m still waiting, though, for Chirring and Gyalzen to return from the mountain. They’re still up there, and I don’t know when they’ll come back. Until they do, there’s no green light for me. 

After that bit of excitement, I crawled into my sleeping bag and read until 9 p.m. During the night, I was woken 2-3 times by large groups walking past my tent. It seems that the crowds are now starting to head toward the mountain, while I still sleep the righteous sleep down here at Base Camp. 

This morning, as always, I woke up just before 6 a.m., got up briefly to pee, and went back to my sleeping bag. There, I read the news about the new pope, the latest on the Eurovision Song Contest (which starts in Basel in a few days), and about the possible overlap between FCB’s championship celebration and the ESC. I’m kind of proud that I had the foresight back in March to pack my FCB shirt for a summit photo. How funny would it be to be standing on the summit of Mt. Everest while FCB wins the championship for the first time in years?! We’ll see what stories Everest has in store for me. 

It’s already 10 a.m. again—I’ve spent another good hour writing this blog. Now I’ll email it off so you can read it soon 😊 

 

Friday, May 9

 After the uneventful rest of the day yesterday, not much happened in camp today either — except that Chirring and Gyalzen returned safely from their carry rounds on the mountain. I ran into them by chance after lunch. We had a brief conversation and decided that we wouldn’t head up during the night, but rather give them a full day to rest tomorrow. They had gone up to the South Col, back down to Camp 2, and then up again to Camp 3 to properly distribute all the oxygen bottles. If I had insisted, we could have gone up already tonight, but it didn’t feel right to me. Also, I still didn’t have my oxygen mask — and without it, I can’t climb anyway. 

A little after 2 p.m., I went for a walk with Regina to the famous trekking rock, just to stretch our legs a bit more than walking from tent to tent. We kept a relaxed pace and enjoyed watching how the trail had changed. Unfortunately, not all trekking guides follow the rules during high season — which state that trekking groups are not allowed to go past the rock. The last 10 minutes of the path were full of trekkers. You can usually tell who they are: they carry a daypack and look quite exhausted when they pass by. We only went up to the final rise before the rock, because what we saw there was too much: around 40 people were crowding around and on top of the rock to get their well-earned souvenir photo. Once again, Regina and I were congratulated for making it to base camp. For me, it was probably the eighth time this year. 

After a few minutes, we made our way back. We passed the Himalayan Vision camp, where they had already started taking down their dome tent. I assume the Chinese group headed for the summit on the same day as Mitch. Usually, after a summit attempt, climbers spend one more night at base camp before either flying back to town by helicopter or starting the return trek on foot. 

Back at base camp, we ran into Ben, who asked if we were planning to go to the coffee tent later. That was my plan, but I wanted to change my shoes first. In the coffee tent, we had the usual chatter, an hour of card games, and the now-regular discussions about the best timing for starting our summit rotation. Before dinner, I moved over to our dining tent, where, as always, the heater was already battling the cold and Juan-Carlos was showing off his DJ skills. The mood quickly became cheerful — a welcome lift for all of us. 

I also received a message from Phunuru saying that he would stop by our camp tomorrow to go over our summit rotation plans with the boys. The weather forecast looks good for May 14–15, so it could be starting soon. After dinner, I read a bit in the dining tent until I was able to pee and then crawled into my sleeping bag once more. There, I tried to ignore the many questions about when I was finally going to start climbing. It’s hard to give a proper answer when I myself have no idea when things will finally begin. And honestly, I’d like to know just as much as everyone else. 

 

Saturday, May 10

 This morning I woke up even earlier than usual because an annoying drone was circling above base camp at 5 a.m. It’s the second day in a row I’ve been woken up by that irritating, persistent noise. I understand that people want to get great footage in good weather, but honestly, that could be done three hours later — the blue sky usually lasts until noon. But no, 5 a.m. is apparently much better... Even the earplugs I wear at night are useless against it. Once the noise finally stopped, I still couldn’t fall back asleep — I might be heading up the mountain tomorrow. That thought made me panic a bit in my sleeping bag, but I was able to calm myself somewhat by continuing to read my book. 

After breakfast, I waited until it warmed up a bit and then enjoyed what will hopefully be my last shower at base camp. This time, unfortunately, the water was only lukewarm — last time, it was almost too hot. Still, I was able to somewhat enjoy the shower, or at least as much as you can when you have to crouch down because of gravity to get enough water pressure out of the hand-held shower head, which you also have to squeeze with your thumb to keep water flowing. The floor is uneven, your feet slide around in slick rubber sandals, and every time you want to soap up, you have to shove the shower head into the sack and hope the air is warm enough not to freeze. Even though I brush my hair twice a day, I still lose a lot of it, and with such low water pressure, the hair just sticks to your body because it won’t wash off. Plus, you never know how much water is left in the sack, so you’re always worried you’ll end up standing there with shampoo in your hair and no water left, freezing. Luckily, before Aconcagua I found some solid shampoo and conditioner on sale, which work pretty well here. So at least I don’t have to worry about running out of shampoo. Still, it doesn’t replace a proper shower, and I really hope that was my last one at base camp. 

As usual, after showering I went straight to the dining tent and sat there until my hair was nearly dry. When the sun shines, it gets warm in the tent fairly quickly — often unbearably so by lunchtime, even in a t-shirt — but for drying hair, it’s perfect. There’s always a slight breeze outside, and getting sick right now, so close to the summit attempt, would be incredibly dumb. 

Because there’s a good chance I’ll begin my summit rotation tonight, I spent the next two hours going through all my gear again. I taped my legs in advance and double-checked my medical kit. Then I restocked my snack bag and added a few extra things — just in case I somehow suddenly develop an appetite during the climb. Just as I finished, Gyalzen showed up and asked if I had my oxygen mask yet. When I said no, he asked me to come with him. We went to an SST tent where an open box held several masks. Chirring was sitting outside. Apparently, they only had one small-sized mask left — and it had such a short hose that it would be hard to move around with the oxygen bottle on your back. So I had to settle for a medium-sized one. Fortunately, it fit pretty well if you tightened the right straps, so I was able to accept the compromise. Still, it’s amazing how you're suddenly confronted with a done deal — and whether the mask is too big or not seems irrelevant to the Nepali in charge. 

We also checked the hose and all the connections carefully — if the mask doesn’t work, we won’t reach the summit. Chirring and Gyalzen also received masks, which we triple-checked. We were also given four regulators to fit onto the oxygen bottles and adjust the flow rate — one of them as a spare, just in case. After that, we packed a few “wag bags” — the bags you use as toilets starting from Camp 3, and which you have to carry back down yourself. I doubt I’ll use many, considering I barely eat up there, but better to have them than not. Then we returned to my tent and went over everything I’d be bringing one last time. Clothes, crispbread, summit gloves — we packed them into a duffel that Gyalzen took right away. The rest I laid out neatly, since we’d apparently be starting at midnight. 

Shortly afterward, Gyalzen came back and asked me to pick more food for the high camps. I followed him to the Sherpa kitchen, where Chirring opened a rice sack filled with a box of supplies. When he opened the box, it nearly exploded — it was packed with rice, porridge, sweets, chocolate, plastic bottles, and more. I was surprised so much could fit inside. The guys told me to take what I wanted to have enough food for the climb. They didn’t care that I already had a big snack bag stashed at Camp 2 and another packed in my backpack. As if I’d eat through both and still be hungry… Just to please them, I took three small granola-style packs, a can of Pringles, and two mini bottles of some overly sweet-looking pink drink. I honestly don’t know who I’m carrying all this food for — I’ll eat maybe half of it, at most

My plan after the summit is to eat a portion of popcorn and then hike down to Pangboche. To avoid wasting time packing later, I decided to use the time before lunch to start filling my two duffel bags. The trek to Lukla will take three to four days — I won’t need much, but I tried to balance the weight between both bags. Soon it was lunchtime, and I took the last ten minutes to call my mom. Then I ate some pasta and fried eggs. Just in time for dessert, Phunuru walked into the dining tent. As expected, he knew half the people there. I gave him a moment to chat and finished my fruit. Then we went with the guys to my tent to go over all final questions and do one last check. It took about an hour to get everyone on the same page. We checked all the gear again, the altitude meds, and food supplies. Then we reviewed the plan and timeline. 

Since the weather forecast still looked good for May 14, we agreed to begin our summit push at 00:30. If conditions changed, we could always hold at Camp 2 — not the warmest place, but with food and a dining tent for some company. For extra certainty, Phunuru said he’d contact two other guide friends for additional forecasts and send me the updates via WhatsApp. 

I left the meeting feeling confident — it really seemed like we were all aligned, which means a lot to me. The boys had rested enough and were ready. 

Then it was time to head to the coffee tent and toast the decision with a hot chocolate. I joined an all-women’s table with Gaby, Maria, and Prakriti, and we talked about our mountain experiences, what scared us most, and why only Maria was bringing an ice axe to Everest. The longer we sat, the more people joined us — soon there were nine of us. Adriana and Stan showed up with news that Mitch and Gelje had just reached Camp 4 and would go for the summit that night. Bianca and Ben joined too, and before long the tent was packed with 30 people. 

Ngima, Tashi’s son, had just arrived with a film crew making a small documentary about him. Ngima is the youngest person to summit all 14 8000-meter peaks — he did it at 17 or 18, I can’t quite remember. He was at Shishapangma while we were spending our final night at Manaslu Base Camp before heading to Samagaun. He’s incredibly well-educated and well-mannered, and quickly became a role model for many Nepalis. His goal is to significantly raise the reputation of Nepali climbers — and with his record, many are ready to listen. 

Luckily, a few people from the crew left after a while, and the tent became more pleasant. Ben, Bianca, and I started playing cards again — we were tired of hearing the same old “when are you going?” questions. At the next table, someone was telling his neighbor that the forecast now predicted much more wind in the coming days — far worse than expected just yesterday. That got my attention. Phunuru still hadn’t sent me anything, and I started doubting whether we should really head out at midnight. I was caught in a very real 50-50 situation, unsure whether to prepare myself mentally to go — or to stay. I’d already been at base camp for 10 days, waiting for the green light, and now this? 

I was sick of base camp. Pushing away so many thoughts is exhausting, and I could feel my mental strength starting to crack. But I didn’t want to make a wrong decision just because I was fed up. The more I thought about it, the more emotional I became. Fortunately, playing cards distracted me — until 6 p.m., when I had to go back to the dining tent, alone with my thoughts again. 

My gut wasn’t helping, and still no word from Phunuru. Dinner didn’t help either — instead of the expected spaghetti, there were soggy fries in brown sauce, some odd shell-shaped pasta in the same sauce, and two fried eggs. My appetite hit rock bottom. As I looked outside through the tent flap, I thought I saw Gyalzen — maybe he’d heard about the weather change too. I grabbed my jacket and went outside. It turned out to be Tashi, but Gyalzen and Chirring were standing by the Puja spot, so I walked over to them. I told them I still hadn’t heard from Phunuru — and just then, Chirring’s phone rang. It was Phunuru. He, Gyalzen, and Chirring spoke for about five minutes before I got to talk to him. The connection was terrible, so I went to get my phone and reached him via WhatsApp. He had already sent me two documents — the forecast had dramatically worsened. It was clear: climbing tonight was a bad idea. The next good window looked like May 16–18. We agreed to wait two more days at base camp. Most teams had already paused anyway — CTSS even recalled their teams from Camp 2. 

That worked for me. More than anything, I just wanted a clear decision — after four hours of limbo, it was a relief. Back in the dining tent, though, I couldn’t hold back my emotions. Two more days at base camp may not sound like much. But after 31 days of mostly waiting here, getting delayed again right before the summit push hits harder than people back home might imagine. 

I updated my family, posted the decision as my status, and tried to calm down. My mind was overflowing: the strongest thought was that I just wanted to go home. I want to be out of the cold, to be held by Raphael again, to cuddle our little ones, laugh with my friends, decide what and when to eat. I don’t want to crawl into a freezing sleeping bag anymore, see urine splashes on my down boots — or wear them all day. I don’t want to sit in a dining tent full of strangers, even though Regina and Juan-Pedro have become friends. I don’t want to spend 8 hours a day staring at a screen or worry about eating three meals a day. These are just a few things that come to mind when I think about what two more days really mean. 

It means I won’t set foot on Swiss soil for at least two more weeks — and only if everything goes smoothly: no flight delays in Lukla, my duffels arrive in Kathmandu when I do, and I can easily reschedule my flight home. All of that is far from guaranteed — and first, I still have to climb the highest mountain on Earth. That requires mental strength I currently can’t find in myself. Oh — and the fourth-highest, the very next day. 

So it’s hopefully understandable that I didn’t feel like writing long WhatsApp messages. Still, I didn’t want to miss my planned call with Raphael. He had to let me cry for ten minutes before we could talk normally. He told me it was just two more days — compared to the 28 years I’ve already waited, that’s nothing. But it’s not nothing. Since I left Switzerland, I’ve been pushing thoughts of “after Nepal” to the side. I don’t want to get excited about things to come, because there’s always that tiny chance that I won’t live to see them. I don’t want to think that thought either — so the future doesn’t fit in my head. 

At the same time, I don’t want to dwell on what the summit push will be like either. So I shove that out of my head, too. Constantly pushing away two major emotional spheres eats up a lot of energy. I’ve been doing it for six weeks, and now the walls are starting to crack. Sure, I distract myself daily and try to stay productive — but mentally, that effort never stops. 

After I calmed down, we could talk normally again, and Raphael even made me laugh. Of course, I had to wake up the little ones so I could see them again, though now I miss them even more. After the call, I was so drained I went straight to my tent. It didn’t feel cozy anymore, since everything was packed. So I unpacked a few things to make it feel less empty, and then got ready for bed. 

 

 

 

 Sunday, May 11 

This morning I was once again woken up by that damn drone noise. Are they seriously planning to keep this up every morning at 5 a.m.? At least I knew from the sound that today would be another sunny day. Last night before falling asleep, I made a conscious decision not to drive myself crazy over the 2x 12 hours I somehow have to get through. First, I decided to read a bit and catch up on the news. That’s how I found out that — if all goes according to plan — FC Basel will be the new Swiss champions by Wednesday at the latest. Another big event I’ll miss as a Basel native, alongside the Eurovision. I brought an FCB jersey for the summit and am already looking forward to raising it for the new champions. 

I also had the realization that maybe I brought these extra two waiting days upon myself — I wrote a month ago that I wouldn’t go on my summit rotation unless all three of us had proper rest days. If we’d gone up last night, Chirring and Gyalzen would’ve only had one. Is Everest agreeing with me and holding us back for that reason? I’m trying to regain 100% trust in the process — which is just as hard as not thinking about the future. But that’s the work I have to do right now, and I believe I’ll grow from it. That — and similar thoughts — are my mantras, but emotionally I’m still pretty raw. I barely made it to the dining tent before I had to hold back tears again. 

Honestly, I don’t even want to hold them back, but I also don’t want to cry constantly — it’s exhausting and gives me headaches. I should be enjoying this. Wonderfully fresh air, surrounded by mountains, at the base camp of Mount Everest. But this upcoming climb is so important to me. This dream has been with me for so long that it’s just too much. Too much that it’s not starting yet, too much that it is about to start, too much that it’s so close and yet so far. I don’t know whether I still have the mental strength for the hard days. I don’t know whether my legs are still strong enough. I don’t know whether I’ll be able to handle the number of people on the mountain — something I desperately wanted to avoid. I came early so I’d be ready before everyone else, and now everyone seems to be going up at the same time I am. 

My biggest fear — being stuck behind slow and inexperienced climbers — grows massive just thinking about it. Another bubble I try to shove away. And then there’s Mitch. Dr. Berus told us over breakfast that Mitch reached the summit and is now descending to Camps 4 and 2. Just imagining how he must have felt up there brings me to tears again. Everest holds nearly the same significance for him as it does for me. He’s waited 27 years, also lost his father, and trained and worked for this — and now he’s done it. That makes me incredibly happy, which in turn makes me cry. After today, I’m sure everyone thinks I’m the biggest crybaby. But I’m just so proud of Mitch, and I feel that I’ll soon experience that same feeling of standing on the summit. 

But again — I have to hold back that feeling too. I have to push it away until the time comes. 

For those who might think that "two more days" doesn’t sound so bad, I’ll try to tell a story to help you understand what it feels like: 

 

Imagine: You’re getting the keys to your dream house. But those keys are locked in a box far away. You have to hike for ten days to even get close to the box. You only take the essentials with you, because each day the temperatures drop lower and lower. Finally, after ten tough days, you reach a village — let’s call it “E-Village.” It’s better equipped than the places you passed through on your way. You still have to sleep in a tent, but at least you have hot tea available anytime and a sleeping bag on a cot — hey, it’s not a real bed, but it’ll do. 

Since the hike was exhausting, you’re allowed a few rest days in E-Village. You get three meals a day — you can’t choose what’s served, but the cook does his best to prepare a variety. Sometimes the combinations are odd — potatoes count as a vegetable with pasta, or cookies are a side dish to pizza. But at least there’s food. It doesn’t matter if you usually only eat once a day back home — here you must eat three times a day. The next leg of the journey to the box requires a lot of energy, and you’ve already spent plenty getting this far. 

To keep things hygienic, there are various toilet tents. They don’t have soundproof walls, but hey — everyone pees, even if 20 cm away there’s a group of Nepalis chatting. Toilet paper only shows up after a week — none of the men thought women might need it too. A waste bucket appears another week later, but no problem — just walk across camp with your used paper; there’s a trash bin and hand sanitizer in the dining tent. 

Then, finally, the second part of your journey begins. You walk three more days and can now see the box in the distance. But you still can’t open it — your body has to acclimatize first. You take tons of photos, ask thousands of questions about how to reach the box. The answers are vague, but you don’t care — you’re so close. After this short trip, you return to E-Village and wait a few more days. 

Days pass. Nobody tells you when you can go. The good weather forecast is reserved for the locals, whose language you don’t speak. You rely on vague internet predictions. It doesn’t bother you — not yet — because dedicated helpers are out clearing obstacles from the path to the box. But they also need rest. Other helpers are already rested, so a brave hiker heads out — they’re going to the box! That’s when it hits you: over 500 other hikers are here too, all waiting to go. Some with one helper, some with three. Add it up — that’s a lot of people who all want to go to the box at the same time. 

You don’t mind — you came early, after all. You wanted to get there before the crowds. But the laws of the box are different, and the weather gods are in charge. And so you sit, day after day, in E-Village. Every day starts and ends in the cold. You have to eat each meal, even if your appetite is gone — because if you skip a meal, helpers worry immediately. Your normal routines don’t apply anymore. Toothbrushing happens in the cold, there’s no sink, no bathroom. A plastic bowl with a bag in it has to suffice. If you want clean clothes, you wash them yourself. Ask for hot water. If you wash after noon, the sun is gone and the clouds roll in. Temperatures drop below freezing after 5 p.m. — but hey, you’ve got a down jacket. Isn’t it nice to wear down jackets every morning and night for weeks? During lunch, you sweat in a hot dining tent wearing a t-shirt — great contrast, right? 

Cold feet are standard. The ground’s not heated — oh, and I forgot: E-Village is built on a glacier. It’s melting. Sometimes steps need to be rebuilt. If a rock slides into a tent, let’s hope no one’s inside. There’s a social center — the coffee tent. Open from 9 to 6, unlimited free coffee or hot chocolate. And the dining tent offers free beer — the table half-covered in snacks. Too bad if you’re not hungry, but at least the option to eat more is always there. 

All you want is to go get that key from the box so you can finally go home. But your patience is wearing thin. Everyone keeps talking about the box — you hear about it everywhere. You want to conserve your energy, so you avoid walking around camp all day. You fear wasting energy you’ll need to reach the box — energy you’ve waited 31 days to use. 

What must be going through your mind by now? 

I’ll stop the story here — I think the point is clear. No matter how lovingly people at home try to imagine what it’s like to spend two more days in this camp, they won’t understand. And that’s probably another reason why this waiting feels so unbearable. No one at home can truly understand. But I chose this path, and I’ve already walked 90% of it. Even if part of me wants to give up the last 10% and go home, I won’t. I’ve made it through six weeks — I can survive two more. 

I hope I still have the energy and mental strength for my goals. And if not, I hope it’s at least enough for Everest. This afternoon, I’m planning a short walk out onto the glacier to collect some stones, and then I’ll check if there are any willing card players in the coffee tent. I’m still trying not to think about when it’ll finally start — and trying to trust the mountain. Everest has a plan, and my job is to follow it, no matter what happens, when, or why. 

Now I’m using the half hour before lunch to upload this blog — maybe it’ll help a few more people at home understand what it feels like to spend yet another two days at base camp, still not knowing whether I truly have what it takes for the summit. 

 

 

Sunday, May 11 – Addendum

Surprisingly, the Sunday afternoon turned out to be quite positive. After lunch, I took a little walk on the glacier. I had the idea of collecting a few small stones to bring back home. Crossing the river of meltwater is always a bit of a challenge because the stones in the stream are also on melting ice, and you never know if a stone that was solid yesterday might suddenly shift when you step on it today. Of course, you don’t want to get injured just before your summit attempt. I tried to pay attention to different types of stones so that the collection would be nicely varied. After that, I took a small detour and then headed back toward the camp. When I was almost at the top, I saw a climber below me who looked familiar. It was Robert, a guide from CTSS, on his way to his camp. I had met him a few weeks ago with his client, Andrea, on the way to the Pumori Highcamp. I greeted him and asked how Andrea was doing. He recognized me and said that she was currently in Periche, recovering from a cough. After three days of sitting around in camp, he had had enough of it, so he decided to take regular walks to Gorak Shep, spend some time there, and then return. He was just on one of those walks and took nearly half an hour to chat. There, I was able to unload some of my frustration, and he gave me a few tips on how I could survive the waiting time. His boss, Mike Hamill, had spent 16 days waiting in camp during his first Everest expedition before finally being able to head for the summit. It was the longest wait since, and Mike said that he had never felt more prepared after that. I believe that, in general, just talking with another person helped me. When it started to snow, we said our goodbyes, and I went back to my tent with a slightly improved mood to change clothes once again for the cold hours ahead. Then, I went to the coffee tent, because hot chocolate usually helps lift the mood. There, I met Ben and Charlie, who works for Everest One. Shortly after, Bianca joined us, and it didn’t take much discussion to realize that we could all use a little card game to cheer us up. We ended up playing for about three hours, and it’s amazing how easy it is to switch off your thoughts and focus solely on the game and fun when you have such great company. Charlie’s boss had gone to Lukla because of a bad cough, so he had some free time, which he clearly enjoyed. Ben seems to dream of home just as much as I do. He had already booked his flight two days ago and had to reschedule it once. We’ll see if that will be enough, or if he needs to reschedule again. In any case, we played until just before dinner and even planned to spend the afternoon together tomorrow. Afterward, I went to my tent, intending to sleep, but the game that could make FCB the champions was already on. I couldn’t fall asleep until the game was over and it was clear that FC Basel was the champion this year. In Basel, numerous champagne bottles were probably opened. I celebrated the title with a nap. 

 

 

 

 Monday, May 12

In the morning, when I woke up, the first thing I did was check the Swiss news and bask in the videos from the championship celebration. Of course, I wasn’t happy that I couldn’t be there, but on the other hand, I could still celebrate by wearing my FCB shirt now, rather than waiting until the summit. This gave me a pretty good mood as I sat down at the breakfast table on time once again. After breakfast, I enjoyed more pictures and videos on social media and decided to take a few photos in the shirt. Then I went straight to the coffee tent because today Mitch was supposed to return to base camp after his summit ascent, and I wanted to congratulate him on his tremendous achievement. In the tent, I ran into Stan, who said it would be a few more hours before Mitch, Gelje, and Furi returned because the three of them decided to sleep a little longer in Camp 2 and start their descent later. More and more familiar faces showed up in the tent, and the mood was lively. After a while, Adrianna appeared, checking the GPS data on her Garmin to try to estimate when the three would arrive. Of course, this had to be filmed since it was Mitch’s final steps of a 237-day journey. Adri and Stan planned to go to the Crampon Point to meet them, and we all wanted to let them have that moment, so we stayed chatting in the coffee tent. At 1 p.m., I had to go back for lunch, and still, there was no sign of the group returning to base camp. I also stopped by Chirring and Gyalzen to discuss when we would make the decision about when to set off. Claudine had arranged contact with a Swiss company known for weather forecasts for expeditions earlier in the morning. Ueli Steck had worked with them before. This happened because Adri had told me that she normally gets accurate data from Meteoswiss during an expedition and pays for it. I didn’t know it was such a big business, and you get customized models. I asked Claudine if she had an account with Meteoswiss so that we wouldn’t have to pay. As one of my biggest supporters, she apparently dropped everything and took care of it right away. She also sponsors me, as such information isn’t free. I’m not sure how I’ve earned this, but once again, I’m endlessly grateful for Claudine’s efforts. I agreed with the guys that we would definitely decide once we had this weather forecast. If it didn’t come today, we would likely stay another day in base camp.
 After lunch, I went back out to walk on the glacier. My sister had given me the task of looking for heart-shaped stones and drawing a unicorn in the snow. Since the snow on the glacier wasn’t very accessible, and there were millions of little stones scattered on the ice, I decided to create a unicorn out of the stones. Finding heart-shaped stones wasn’t easy because they came in many different colors, and my eyes had trouble sorting them out. I also wanted to take some of the little heart stones home, so they couldn’t be too large. But since I had time, I took my time. Once I was satisfied with the results, I took a picture of the unicorn with my phone and then headed back to the tent. On the way, I had the idea that I could also ask the people back home to create unicorns, and so a little idea formed where my friends and family could make unicorns at home and send me the pictures.
 After that, I went to the coffee tent, where I saw many smiling faces and an extremely happy, but also very tired face: Mitch and Gelje had just arrived a few minutes earlier and walked straight into the coffee tent. Finally, I could congratulate Mitch in person with a long hug and tears on both sides. Gelje looked like he could head out again tomorrow, but Mitch didn’t look quite so fresh. His voice was completely gone, which made conversation a bit difficult. After a few moments, it was time for the two of them to eat something substantial, so they disappeared into their dining tent. The rest of us kept talking a bit about their experiences and then started playing cards again. Less than an hour later, Mitch returned. In fresh clothes, without his mountaineering boots, he sat down, and you could tell he hadn’t fully realized what he had achieved over the past 8 months, and especially the past 2 days. He tried to handle his phone messages while also playing cards with us. He looked like he was just glad to be back and enjoying our presence. We tried to ask him specific questions about the route to better prepare for our summit attempt, but somehow, everyone was overwhelmed that one of our own had just climbed Mount Everest and found virtually an empty mountain. Adri had shown us some pictures in the morning, and on the summit ridge, there was a yawning emptiness. Mitch had experienced something that very few have and will ever experience: A Mount Everest that he had to share with maybe five other climbers. The summit ascent was 10 hours long, but the descent to Camp 4 was only 2 hours. He said that the descent to Camp 2 was extremely tough because it was so long, and that was why they decided to have a long night in Camp 2. We left him to focus on his phone since we could all imagine what was coming his way. The rest of us played a little longer, and just before 6 p.m., I headed to the dining tent, where I had a meeting with the guys. By chance, I ran into Andrei outside, who I had actually expected to be in Camp 2. Because the weather forecast for the next few days predicted strong winds, almost everyone who had gone for their summit attempt yesterday and stayed in Camp 2 had returned to base camp. They were among them and would now rest for a few days before trying again. It seems like we did the right thing by staying another two days in base camp. Unfortunately, by 6 p.m., I still hadn’t received the eagerly awaited weather info, so the discussion with Gyalzen and Chirring was brief: We decided to wait one more day and hopefully get the information tomorrow so we could make a final decision about when to go. This allowed me to go to dinner with peace of mind and soon slip back into my sleeping bag. By the afternoon, I had already received several unicorn pictures, which always brought a smile to my face. I’m actually surprised I didn’t think of this idea sooner, as it’s a lovely idea for both sides. For me, because I get funny pictures, even though the download time is ridiculously long. And for those back home, because it’s the only way they can support me. Unless, of course, someone suddenly strolls into base camp in the next few days, but honestly, I don’t expect that. In any case, I fell asleep with a smile on my face again today and only took off the FCB shirt when it was time to sleep. 

 

 Tuesday, May 13

 Since I had lent my Wi-Fi access to Stan yesterday, I couldn’t check for FCB pictures in the news this morning. He and Mitch were sharing the Wi-Fi in base camp, which usually worked well. But when you get back to camp after the summit, you want to spread the good news to friends and family that you’re back safe. Stan, however, had work to do, which wasn’t possible without Wi-Fi. When he asked Mitch yesterday if he could manage an hour or two without Wi-Fi, I could see in his eyes that he definitely didn’t want that. So, I gave Stan the access for the whole evening so that no one had to miss out. 

Unfortunately, this led to login issues on my side, but after a long hour, they were suddenly resolved. Shortly after the first login, Phunuru called me on WhatsApp. He had tried to reach me several times last night, but I was unavailable. Phunuru wanted to know if we had made a decision about when we would go up. It seems like May 17–19 is still a good window. He had also spoken to Tashi this morning. I told him about the Swiss weather forecast and that we wanted to wait for it before making a decision. He made it clear again that I should focus only on myself and not worry about others. There will be more people on the mountain than during my rotation, but we are well-prepared and, since we are a small team of three, we are much more flexible than most others. I told him I would meet with Gyalzen and Chirring at 12:30 to exchange ideas again. Phunuru will be going from Lobuche Highcamp to Pangboche today and might not be reachable via WhatsApp but will be available by radio. 

After the phone call, I almost missed breakfast and had to sit in the sun. It gets really hot there, so today, I breakfasted in a T-shirt. Afterward, I checked what I needed to charge, in case we would leave tonight, and then I headed to the — surprise... coffee tent, to have a hot chocolate. There, I once again ran into Stan and Mitch and had a calm chat with them. It seems like Mitch won’t have any peace for a long time. For today alone, he has several interviews scheduled from 1–5 p.m., and tomorrow from 9 a.m.–5 p.m., it will continue in the same way. Since the Wi-Fi has been rather poor in EBC over the past few days, they decided, contrary to the usual principles, to fly by helicopter to the valley. Several major newspapers in England ran big articles, which sparked a lot of interest from various media that need to be fulfilled. The two will probably stay in Nepal until the end of May, hoping for some quiet time. We all at the table tried to imagine how Mitch, still without a voice, would manage to give 4 hours of interviews today. That will surely be funny to listen to, especially because there are radio interviews as well. I hope he takes an hour each day to himself to let everything sink in, because otherwise, the next few weeks will be hell for him. 

After we were able to enjoy the hot chocolate together, it was time to say goodbye because the helicopter doesn’t wait. I really hope we can meet again for a dinner in Kathmandu, as Stan and Mitch are people who radiate pure humanity and are incredibly sensitive. They have been a great support to me over the past five weeks, and they truly deserve a good farewell in civilization. The lives of these two guys will change forever because of the project, and I hope they don’t lose their humanity in the process. I don’t worry about Stan because he’s the man behind it. But Mitch will surely be faced with many difficult decisions in the future. I hope he learns to say no soon and gives himself as much space as he does for his project. 

After the farewell, I chatted a bit with the others and then headed back to the dining tent, where I had made plans with the guys. Unfortunately, there was still no weather forecast in the inbox, so we decided to meet at 6 p.m. Gyalzen said the weather on the 18th would be better than the 17th. But if everyone knows that and the weather for the 17th is still climbable, I’m okay with choosing the 17th as the summit day. Most others seem to be aiming for the 18th/19th. But, it’s still too early to make a decision. Let’s see how it looks in 5 hours. 

For lunch, I had pasta with tomato sauce and even got a second helping. Now I’ve been sitting here writing my blog for 1.5 hours, which I plan to send out today. Before lunch, I tried calling Raphael again, but the Wi-Fi was still not great, so we spent the first 10 minutes just saying “hello, hello, hello” before we could talk normally. But the choppiness soon annoyed us, so we kept the conversation short. We’re both excited that a possible summit day is getting closer because that means returning to Switzerland is also getting closer. Right now, I’m aiming for somewhere between May 22 and 25, which is in just two weeks. 

During the summit ascent, I’ll take notes on my phone for the blog, but I’ll probably write the full report in Kathmandu. I ask for a bit of patience and hope everyone accepts that the long report will be read a little later. Remember, all further updates will be in the next chapter, “The Summit Rotation” 😊. 

 

 

 

 

Update – May 19, 2025

 Annemie reached the summit of Mount Everest on May 18, 2025, at 7:55 AM (Nepal time).
 I have just received the message that Annemie, Gyalzen, and Chering have arrived safely at Base Camp.
 We are incredibly proud of Annemie and have no words for this achievement. A huge WOW – Annemie, you have finally been able to fulfill your dream.
 With all our love, your family. 

 Updates will follow from Annemie – at the latest once she is back in Kathmandu. 

 

Suuuuummiiiit

 

I reached the summit of Mount Everest in almost windless conditions on May 18, 2025, at 7:55 AM (Nepal time), and I’m incredibly proud! 

A lot happened during the rotation, so it took me a while to be ready to put everything into words. What you can read below is my personal perspective on my summit success and shouldn't be generalized. I won’t sugarcoat anything and will also talk about events I wish I hadn’t experienced. I share this in the hope that you, dear readers, might better understand why it took me so long to find the right words. If you plan to tell your children about my experiences, I recommend reading everything first—some parts are difficult even for my own mind to grasp and accept, let alone for a child to comprehend. 

But first, I want to thank all of you for your interest and for following along so eagerly. Thanks to you, I was able to push myself again and again to keep writing my blog—so you wouldn't miss anything and so I could bring you closer to what such an expedition is really like. 

Thank you, thank you, thank you!!! 

Wednesday, 14th of May - EBC to Camp 2


Our summit rotation started on the morning of May 14 at 1:15 AM. I had set my alarm for 12:20 AM so I’d have a little time after getting dressed to call Raphael. In Switzerland it’s 3 hours and 45 minutes earlier, so for him it was just before bedtime. It felt good to talk one more time, knowing that after that there would be six days of radio silence. We were supposed to leave at 1:00, but I was slower than expected because I just had too much on my mind. Before attempting the summit, one says farewell at the Puja shrine, and if one is doing it properly, juniper is burned. Unfortunately, there isn’t a juniper shrub in the wide area around Basecamp, so at Everest juniper incense sticks are burned instead. Gyalzen had already prepared that, so we were met by smoke as we stood in front of the shrine. For me this moment is always very emotional and solemn, because it marks the “go” signal, and afterwards one must give one’s best over several days. I thanked the gods in my thoughts that I would really get my chance and at the same time asked for protection for the days on the mountain. Then we went around the shrine and pretty directly down to the glacier. The path through the glacier looked mostly the same as on our prior rotation, although quite a bit of ice had melted and you could see that in the warmth of the day a lot of water was flowing toward the valley. In the middle of the night everything was frozen, though, and thanks to the markings made by the Icefall Doctors, the route was easy to follow, so that only 29 minutes after we set off we arrived at the Crampon Point. There we were stared at by several smoking Sherpas in the dark. Not exactly the ideal welcome, especially with my asthma‐ridden lungs. Luckily the smokers were just finishing their break, so after a longer pee break I couldn’t see them anymore. They had a group of Chinese climbers in tow who apparently were on the same schedule as we were.
The ascent to Crampon Point also showed me that this night was relatively mild, because I was already sweating for half the climb. So I used the break to adjust my clothing. A little while later I regretted the clothes change, though. The dear Chinese climbers who had left Crampon Point about 10 minutes before us we encountered again soon after. They hadn’t put on their crampons yet, because much of the first section of the route was still rock instead of ice. And when I say “much,” I mean not the entire part of the route. About 20 minutes after the Crampon Point there is a steep wall that by day is covered by a waterfall of meltwater. At night this waterfall is frozen. Our Chinese friends had to climb that waterfall one by one using a jumar and were slipping every second on the ice. To the left of the route there are nice dry rocks, with various possibilities to place even large mountaineering boots, but then you wouldn’t be as well secured to the rope and you’d need some experience in rock climbing… So we waited for at least half an hour below that icefall until it was our turn. Fortunately, a short way after that steep wall there is the second Crampon Point, where normally the Icefall Doctors have the climbers put on their crampons, and even the Chinese had no other choice but to do so. So we were able to overtake the big group and suddenly we were almost alone on the route. Now at last we could go at our usual pace, although every now and then we met a pair roped together. We could overtake them because especially in the first half of the icefall there are safe spots where you can stop and/or pass. On my very first entry into the icefall I was out for around 3 hours until we had to turn back at a ridge in the middle of the icefall because the ropes had been removed. Maybe you remember—I wrote about it in detail back then. Even at that time that ridge didn't feel great. Now, almost four weeks later, it had become even more unstable: it was more a big cornice than a ridge, and in front of us was unfortunately a very slow group of five. So we waited a bit before entering the cornice, then more or less ran across it, so we wouldn’t be forced to stand there waiting for the group to move onward. Although I was by now well acclimatized to that altitude, running those 200 m on the rope was still very hard, and I was glad we could pause shortly after overtaking them.

About half an hour later we stood at the foot of the infamous double ladder (actually a quadruple ladder) mounted over a very deep glacier crevasse. At the beginning of the season the ladder had been laid horizontally over a large crevasse. But in the second week a side of the crevasse collapsed, so the ladder now is installed vertically on the remaining side. To avoid too much bottleneck, the Icefall Doctors also put up a second ladder. So it’s two sets of 4 aluminum ladders joined by ropes and secured in several places to the ice, so they don’t collapse or slip away. I felt pretty good climbing up, but that was also because I couldn’t really perceive the depth of the crevasse in the darkness. After this long ladder the route flattens out somewhat for a while over terrain full of crevasses. Since the rotation, many crevasses had widened, and the Doctors have thus installed some ladders, because beyond a certain width, especially for Sherpas, jumping across is no longer possible. I prefer ladders a thousand times over jumps—they at least give you some sense of security when crossing. I had practiced the crossings many times, both at home and during icefall training. The rung spacing here is shorter than at home, so with my small feet I could place both the front crampon teeth and those on the heel each on a rung.
In the distance we could now see a group of six slowly but surely drawing nearer. They were climbing at about our pace, but they needed more breaks than we did. I noticed that while I was still getting winded similarly as on my first rotation, I recovered much faster, so our rest breaks were much shorter than those of the big group. But since we were now very close to Camp 1, and overtaking here is harder, we didn’t even try and just followed the six guys. The six waves waiting for us before Camp 1 were less bad this time. I think that was because I knew how many there were and could count them mentally as we climbed. When we arrived at Camp 1 and I looked at my watch, I was pretty amazed. Despite the Chinese‐caused delay at the start and the slower pace toward the end, we took only 5 hours and 10 minutes from Basecamp to Camp 1. On our rotation it had taken us 6 hours, and everyone in Basecamp I had become friends with had taken longer. The best part was that all three of us felt good upon arrival, although Chirring and Gyalzen once more carried a great amount of gear up the mountain. Camp 1 looked a bit different this time: all the sleeping tents were gone except 2, and only the kitchen and dining tents stood. Normally on the summit rotation nobody sleeps in Camp 1 anymore, so everything had been scaled down. We took a long break during which I drank a liter of tea and ate a bit of muesli and Chirring and Gyalzen stuffed themselves with noodle soup. I didn’t want to pause longer because from around 9 AM the Western Cwm becomes like an oven when the weather is good – and today we had pretty good weather. In the distance the Lhotse Face was clearly visible, and what I saw there took my breath away a little: an endless line of people climbing vertically, and it was not clear whether most of them were going up or down. I just hoped that all of them were descending, because if they weren’t, they would cross our path by the time we were headed for Camp 4, which would promise long delays. I tried to block those thoughts and focus on my own path, which would first lead me to Camp 2. Thankfully the first 1.5 hours of that stretch were still fairly pleasant, after that it got brutally hot. Since it’s silly in terms of sunburn to go in a T‑shirt, we all wore long sleeves. In Camp 1 I had been cold so I hadn’t wanted to take off my thermal bottoms under the climbing pants. Now, in the Western Cwm, I wished I hadn’t kept them on. Unfortunately it was too dangerous to get rid of them in the middle of the glacier, so all I could do was walk as slowly as possible so as not to sweat too much. We also took two large breaks—these made the suffering in the heat longer, but also gave us time to drink enough and eat something. We had an interesting discussion about money. Gyalzen asked me how much I had paid for my expedition (USD 72,000), and in exchange I learned how much the two were earning over the two months: they get USD 6,000 each for the work, and if they reach both summits, I give them another USD 2,000 bonus. I promised them right there that they would get the USD 2,000 in any case, even if we didn’t reach the summits. To me the system with a summit bonus is illogical anyway. The two guys do outstanding work for two months; on my rest days they carry their enormously heavy loads up the mountain, and then you only set the bonus based on whether you reach the summit? As if if you don’t reach the summit, they didn’t do their job. I think they didn’t really believe me when I assured them they would get the money no matter what. Probably they’ve just experienced too often otherwise. But for me it was already clear back when I stood in Liestal at the bank counter and saw the dollars in front of me. About 2.5 hours later we finally arrived at lower Camp 2, and the only thing standing between us and the well‑deserved lunch was the last climb to the upper part of Camp 2. That hill takes all your nerve, because Camp 2 looks so close, but you’re still 30‑40 minutes away. At least this time everything was free of ice, so no fear of slipping. Still it was pure suffering, because the sun is merciless here too. So I was glad when finally, 3 hours from Camp 1, I reached the dining tent. I felt drunk—an indication that the jump from Basecamp at 5,300 m to 6,500 m is no small feat. The discomfort fortunately went away after two cups of black tea, and I felt okay. Unfortunately shortly after, a Sherpa brought me a plate of noodles and just seeing the noodles turned my stomach. I just barely managed to stop myself from vomiting on the plate. I begged him urgently to take the plate away immediately and sat on my little chair, probably bright green in the face from nausea. I definitely didn’t want to throw up, but the feeling of sickness would not go away. I tried drinking a little, and thinking of everything except that plate of noodles—which was more or less partly successful. Then I considered where I could vomit, because I was still sitting right in front of the dining tent in fresh air. I shyly asked Chirring where I could go to empty my stomach. His look was priceless and if I hadn’t felt so sick I probably would have laughed out loud. He told me to just go down toward the route and away from the tents. So I stood up and wobbled a few meters down to the route. Obviously it did my stomach good to get space that it hadn’t had while sitting on the camp chair. After 5 minutes of walking back and forth and breathing deeply, I felt noticeably better and the nausea slowly disappeared. When I came back, four Sherpas looked at me questioningly and I was able to give the all‑clear. I was really glad I’d overcome the sickness, because every drop of fluid is important at that altitude and would have had to be replaced. Now I was just extremely tired, but I could not sleep. Sleeping during the day means you don’t drink, which in turn means the body has more trouble with the altitude. Also, you might not be able to sleep at night then, and you are not as rested, which could be deadly on summit day. So I fought against sleep with all my strength, even though on my chair I would drift off for seconds at a time. When the chair got too uncomfortable, I moved into my tent and repacked and reorganized my backpack. Unfortunately the tents during the day become unbearably hot, so I sometimes felt like I was in a sauna. To try not to fall asleep in the heat, I kept changing positions: sometimes I sat outside on an uncomfortable rock, then back on the chair, or in the hot tent wearing a T‑shirt and barefoot. To make sure I would have enough energy for the coming days, I alternated eating Darvidas (a type of crispbread), sweets, or nuts, regularly asked for black tea in the Sherpa kitchen, and tried as few times as possible to go to the very awful toilet. Since the rotation they had added a plastic toilet. But it was overflowing, and hard to aim for because you couldn’t place your feet well—on the left was bare ice, on the right a rock about 10 cm higher than the rest. With large mountaineering boots you can’t lift your heels, as then stability is totally gone. Around the toilet there were plastic bags filled with feces, which you absolutely wouldn’t want to fall onto if you slipped.
There was also a concerning but positive change on the digital side. Camp 2 had very good WiFi, so I could contact family again and let them know I had made it safely through the Icefall. For tea/early dinner I had popcorn once again, which I enjoyed outside with a view of the Lhotse Face. After 6 PM the sun was gone and I moved into the Sherpa kitchen, where I drank two more black teas and, thanks to WiFi, was even able to phone Phunuru briefly. The weather forecast for our possible summit day hadn’t changed, so we could continue following our plan. By 7 PM I was already in the tent, reading a bit until I went to sleep. Tomorrow is planned as a rest day, so I can sleep in as long as I want.


Thursday, 15th of May - Camp 2

I fell asleep pretty quickly — no surprise after all the microsleeps I’d had throughout the day. Since I’d also had tea in the evening, I had to peel myself out of my sleeping bag just before midnight to go pee. We had almost a full moon and the night was clear. I could spot two headlamps on Lhotse below the couloir, and a few more scattered along the route between Camp 2 and Camp 4. Once again, I silently thanked my new iPhone camera, which managed to capture wonderful pictures of this unique landscape, even at night. Afterward, I quickly crawled back into my sleeping bag to get a bit more sleep.

Unfortunately, during the second half of the night, I had cold feet, so I kept waking up to reposition my hot water bottle. At 6 a.m., I had to get up once more to pee but then stayed in my sleeping bag until 11:30, when it got too hot in the tent. For breakfast, I ate some energy bars, and Gyalzen and Chirring took turns showing up each hour to bring me black tea and check if everything was okay.

I spent the time doing crossword puzzles, reading, snacking, and laying out my gear. I planned to leave as much as possible behind at Camp 2 to avoid bringing unnecessary items higher up the mountain. I spent most of the midday and afternoon on the same camping chair as yesterday, so I wouldn’t be tempted to take a nap.

At 1 p.m., Viktor and Wally arrived at Camp 2; they had spent the night before at Camp 1. It was nice not to be alone in the camp anymore, and we talked almost nonstop — also partly to keep Wally from falling asleep. He was feeling just like I had the day before: tired, but unable to nap before the evening. At 2 p.m., the Russians led by Vladimir arrived as well — all of them clearly exhausted and also fighting off sleep. As usual, they got their special meals and mostly kept to themselves.

For lunch, I ate a small plate of dal bhat, which I was even able to finish. I decided I’d have dal bhat again for dinner, assuming that once I was higher up, I probably wouldn’t feel like eating such rich food anymore. I also treated myself to an afternoon snack in the form of a chocolate stick.

Thanks to the beautiful sunshine again today, I was able to fully charge all my electronic devices using my solar panel — hopefully we’d have enough battery power for photos on summit day. When the sun set, I changed into my down suit because I had already packed away my down pants to be stored at Camp 2.

Unfortunately, the evening dal bhat was extremely spicy, so I couldn’t eat it. As an alternative, I had half a plate of plain white rice and drank a few more cups of black tea. I also talked with Chirring and Gyalzen to confirm that I wouldn't wear my down suit the next day, since we weren’t planning to set off until 8 a.m. The route to Camp 3 turns into an oven when the sun is out, and I didn’t want to risk losing too much energy by sweating in the down suit.

The alternative would have been to leave at 4 a.m. and arrive at Camp 3 before sunrise. But since there’s nothing to do up there anyway, it didn’t make sense to get there that early. So I was happy with the compromise of a later departure without the down suit.

Just before 7 p.m., I was back in my sleeping bag, checked all my gear again, and laid everything out so I’d be ready to go quickly in the morning.

Friday, 16th of May - Camp 2 to Camp 3


 
During the night, I kept waking up because there was heavy coughing going on in the neighboring tents to the left and right. The Russians had clearly not arrived in the best shape at Camp 2, and I sincerely hoped I hadn’t caught anything from them. Even in the Sherpa kitchen, many were coughing, which is why I always wear my buff pulled up to my eyes whenever I’m not eating or drinking. A respiratory infection has cost many Everest hopefuls the summit, and I absolutely didn’t want to risk having to turn back because of a cough. 
My alarm rang at 7 a.m., and I tried to do everything I could while still tucked warmly in my sleeping bag. Then I packed up my mat and sleeping bag and laid them out ready for Chirring and Gyalzen. I also set aside the bag with everything that was to stay in Camp 2. Since I still had a bit of an appetite, I had—by my standards—a good breakfast: a KitKat and some muesli. I drank four cups of tea with it, meaning I had already covered part of the recommended fluid intake. The goal is to drink at least 3 liters, ideally 4. The body loses much more fluid at this altitude, and you have to compensate for that constantly. Luckily, I’m used to drinking a lot back home, and even at high altitude, I can make myself drink even more without much trouble. 
Unfortunately, after breakfast, I had to wait quite a while for my water bottles to be filled with hot water, since the Sherpa kitchen was busy preparing breakfast. Apparently, they hadn’t understood me the night before when I said I’d only eat muesli in the morning—because the second time I came to ask if the water was ready, they handed me a plate with an omelet and said, “This is your breakfast.” I felt a bit bad, but since Mihail from the Russian group was in the dining tent, I managed to pass the omelet on to him. He was happy, and for once, there was no food waste. 
Since breakfast preparations were still in full swing and I was actually ready to go, I sat outside and watched the climbers passing our camp on their way to Camp 3. Not five minutes later, Kenton Cool suddenly walked by with his client Richard. I took the opportunity to chat with him a bit. For those who don’t know: Kenton Cool is the Westerner with the most Everest summits—by 2024, he had climbed my dream mountain 18 times. No other non-Nepali in the world has reached that impressive number. I was thrilled to meet him in person; it gave me additional confidence in our plan to summit on May 18th. After all, he doesn't choose summit days lightly.
 

Just like me, he was a bit concerned about the sheer number of people we could already see on the Lhotse Face. It looked like the entire basecamp had started moving at the same time. This hadn’t been as noticeable to us the day before because we had spent our rest day in the upper part of Camp 2. The good news was that among the many climbers, there was a large group from the Indian Army who had been meticulously preparing for the expedition for a year. They were experienced and, more importantly according to Kenton, friendly and cooperative—which can be a major advantage in critical mountain situations. 

After about 15 minutes, I let Kenton and Richard continue on—they wanted to cover as much ground as possible before the sun made the Face too hot.
 Unexpectedly, the three of us (me, Chirring, and Gyalzen) weren't ready to go until 8:45 a.m. Besides waiting for the hot water, it had also taken longer than expected to pack up the large backpacks of Chirring and Gyalzen. 

Just ten minutes in, I was already grateful that I was carrying my down suit in the backpack and not on my body. The first 3-meter vertical section had me sweating already, and the sun wasn’t even on this part of the route yet. The first 30 minutes felt rough—my legs were extremely heavy, and although we were moving slowly, I was overheating. Even though it’s logistically smart to wear the down suit from Camp 2 onward, I couldn’t imagine how Chirring and Gyalzen were managing in theirs. If I was already sweating in my mountain pants, they must’ve been cooking in those suits. Every time I asked if they weren’t too hot, they just smiled and waved it off. 

After 1 hour and 45 minutes, we reached the bergschrund, the lower edge of the Lhotse Face. The approach included an 8-meter vertical, marking the beginning of the steep section of the route. During my acclimatization rotation, I had learned from Gyalzen to store a small water bottle inside my fleece for easy access when thirsty. Since I was sweating more and more, I eventually unzipped my fleece a bit to get some air—but only to about the navel. The bottle was still secured... or so I thought. 

While hanging in the vertical section and leaning forward to catch my breath, the bottle slipped out of its cocoon. Luckily, it narrowly missed Gyalzen, who was 3 meters below me on the rope, and slid past him and the right side of the route down the slope. Luck was really on our side—it got caught on a rock about 10 meters further down. Even though I told Gyalzen he didn’t have to go get it, he unhooked from the rope and descended the 15 meters in deep snow to retrieve it. 

I was deeply embarrassed. Even if it was “just” a half-liter bottle, it could have caused serious injury if it hit someone. And of course, about 10 Sherpas were sitting above the vertical and witnessed the whole incident. No one was behind Gyalzen on the rope—meaning I could’ve taken out my own Sherpa. I apologized to Gyalzen and Chirring a thousand times and made a mental note to either keep the bottle in my backpack or keep the zipper closed when in verticals. 

We took a long break on the last flat patch before the Face, and I recovered a bit from the shock. After that came the traverse I had already feared during my acclimatization. Luckily, the footholds were better this time, and it didn’t feel like you were about to slip into the deep crevasse below. Also fortunate: ahead of us was only a slow pair, and behind us, no one for quite a while. So we waited until the pair was almost through the traverse before setting off—minimizing our time on the dangerous 20-meter stretch. 

Unfortunately, we still ended up waiting mid-traverse because we had left too early. But the footholds were okay, so it wasn’t too bad for me. I don’t know how Chirring and Gyalzen felt with their heavy packs—I didn’t dare ask much, knowing there was nothing I could do to help. 

After the traverse, the pair ahead of us took a break, allowing us to overtake them and go at our own pace. I found a good rhythm and we overtook two more groups. As we slowly but steadily gained altitude, the heat remained bearable. When I saw Chirring and later Gyalzen removing the upper parts of their down suits, I felt reassured they wouldn’t overheat. 

We continued ascending for another two hours, and just before 1 p.m., we arrived at Camp 3. 14 Peaks and Seven Summit Treks share all the camps on the mountain except Camp 2. Because we arrived early, we were able to choose our tents. I got the one in the middle, and Chirring and Gyalzen set up in the one right next to it. 

To celebrate our successful ascent, Chirring pulled out a Nepali Red Bull, ice-cold and delicious. I didn’t drink much of it, though—I hadn’t had one in two months and knew it could send me running to the toilet, which I really wanted to avoid up here. Doing a "number two" here means using a wag bag, which is quite a hassle. 

Then I started eating. The first thing I grabbed was a pack of crispbread. I ate one piece, wanting to save the rest for summit day in case I got hungry. Sitting in the tent, it suddenly hit me: I was just two days from the summit. After so many years of waiting, the thought felt surreal. I had never been closer to the top of Everest, and I still felt great. 

Unfortunately, the tent heated up quickly, even in Camp 3. I soon found myself sitting outside, feet dangling over a 2-meter drop created during the construction of the tent platform. Chirring reminded me to be careful—once you start sliding in these unsecured spots, it’s hard to stop. I didn’t feel unsafe, especially with a line of tents about 10 meters below us—I’d probably slide into one of them first. But still, not something I wanted to test. 

My wet socks were hanging outside to dry, flapping beside my head like Dumbo ears. Thankfully, nothing smells in the cold. 

Unfortunately, more and more summit hopefuls began arriving in Camp 3, and the tents around me started to fill up quickly. It soon became clear that we would no longer enjoy the luxury of having two tents for the three of us, and I would have to move in with Chirring and Gyalzen. They took a bit of time to reorganize their tent and make space, and then one piece of my gear after another was carefully moved over—always making sure nothing dropped and slid down the hill. It actually worked quite well, and since the sun was still shining brightly, I used the time to stretch my legs a bit. 

“Stretching my legs” here basically meant walking 10 meters to the left behind the tents to pee, then carefully climbing 2 meters down a slope, and walking the 10 meters back in front of the tents. I stood around outside the tents for a bit longer, just to avoid spending too much time in the hot tent. That made Chirring a bit nervous, because I was standing there without being clipped in, and I was wearing only my inner boots. Anyone who’s spent more than a few days with me knows that I can be a bit of a clumsy mess. 😅 

So I slipped onto the 50cm of free space in the Sherpa tent and started organizing my gear a little. Someone had already moved into my old tent—it turned out to be Sefa, a client of 14 Peaks. Interestingly, she had the tent to herself and wasn’t sharing it with any Sherpas. I couldn’t help but feel that it was a little unfair that I couldn’t sleep alone but she could. But in the end, it was also kind of funny to see how quickly total chaos can break out in a tent when three people with high-altitude gear try to squeeze in. 

Back at basecamp, we had already discussed that we’d most likely have to share a tent from Camp 3 onward. And if I hadn’t had a tent to myself earlier, I probably wouldn’t have thought it was unfair at all. But the mountains teach you quickly that life isn’t fair and you have to adapt to many different situations to conserve energy. 

Just before 4 p.m., the tent to our left was also taken—by Ben and Mick, whom I had already befriended at basecamp. It was really nice to see them in such good shape, even though they both looked a bit tired. They hadn’t taken a rest day and had climbed straight from basecamp to Camp 2 the day before, and then set out a bit later today. Since they were wearing their down suits, they had sweated a lot during the day. Their suits were off pretty quickly once they got into the tents—it was just too hot. 

Chirring and Gyalzen were clearly starting to know me well—because to my surprise, I not only got Red Bull, but also popcorn. They had brought a portion of corn especially for me, knowing I wouldn’t eat much at altitude. Since I devoured the first portion faster than expected, they even made a second one, which I also finished completely. Even though I wasn’t hungry, I was able to eat well, and I didn’t feel sick afterward either. That’s what I call being well acclimatized. 😊 

I also drank a lot, and I tried to hold off going to pee for as long as possible so I wouldn’t constantly have to leave the tent. Around 6:30 p.m., Chirring and Gyalzen started getting ready for bed—which I only noticed when they zipped up the tent entrance. Naturally, that was the moment I had to pee again. When they asked where my pee bottle was, I had to honestly admit that I’d left it back in Camp 2. So they opened the tent again and had to move the stove—which was already filled with snow for the next morning—so that I, the princess, could go outside to pee. 

At that moment, I sincerely hoped that I wouldn’t have to go again during the night. My spot in the tent was all the way on the right, and there was no way I’d get out without waking Chirring, who was sleeping in the middle. We even briefly discussed whether I should take the middle spot instead, but with all the gear and the layout, it would’ve been too complicated. All three of us were sleeping with oxygen, and the bottles were packed away in the backpacks for space reasons. We would have had to play a kind of Tetris with mats, sleeping bags, and backpacks—not exactly a great idea at high altitude. So we just hoped that my bladder would hold out until morning. 

Saturday, 17th of May - Camp 3 to Camp 4


Wake-up time today was already at 3:30 a.m., and the time between falling asleep and waking up was too short for my bladder to get back in touch. The first one who had to move after the alarm went off was Chirring. He was the chosen one responsible for boiling water this morning. Luckily, that can be done while sitting in the sleeping bag inside the tent, so at least half your body doesn’t have to be exposed to the cold.

Unexpectedly, I had slept through most of the night. I kept waking up briefly because my sleeping mat and bag kept sliding down toward my feet, but with a bit of "wiggle and pull," I managed to fix it each time.

To give you an idea of how I slept: under my mat at the foot end were several bags filled with cooking items that don’t get damaged easily. So, my feet were about 40 cm higher than my hips. There was also no real space for the backpacks on the side, so we used them as pillows, which meant my head and upper body were another 20 cm higher than my hips. I basically slept like a perfect banana, and yet I was able to sleep.

With the water painstakingly boiled by Chirring, the tea bags they had brought, and the crispbread I had carried up, I had what was nearly the perfect breakfast at 7,000 meters. Every crumb I could eat up here would hopefully give me that little extra energy I’d need in the next two days. But it's always a bit of a tightrope walk, because every time I eat before we set off, I get stomach cramps at the beginning of the climb.

So far, it’s only been cramps—but of course, the fear is always there that it might escalate into an emergency toilet situation. And that’s something I absolutely do not want to experience, especially not on a nearly vertical wall, clipped to a fixed rope, in a climbing harness and down suit.

That’s why my morning motto is: eat lightly, drink a lot, and then try to eat as much as possible once arriving at the next camp—because it’s a bit more manageable there, should you need to go.

This morning, I managed to empty my small Nalgene bottle twice while still enjoying the warmth of my sleeping bag, before we began packing up our gear. That’s 800 ml of pure fuel—because drinking a lot = fewer altitude issues. The body loses a lot more fluid with each breath up here compared to sea level, and the dry oxygen from the bottle makes it even worse. So the risk of needing to pee on the Lhotse Face is actually quite low.

Still, I eventually dragged myself out of my sleeping bag and into my down suit to leave the tent for a pee. To avoid squeezing back into the tent afterwards, I waited until my sleeping bag and mat were already packed and my backpack was ready. I nearly peed into my suit, but that was still better than crawling back into the tent.

When the tent finally spat me out and I looked up the mountain, I was nearly shocked: a huuuuge line of headlamps was already moving along the route above us. The camp was buzzing with activity, and below us, you could already see headlamps heading up the Lhotse Face.

I peed right behind the tent, since Chirring didn’t want me going any farther in the dark and without oxygen. And there I sat—peeing and watching this surreal light show that none of us really wanted. Somehow, there was also something calming about watching those little lights bobbing back and forth, barely seeming to move at all.

Well, there was no avoiding it—we had to (or rather, wanted to) go up too. So I strapped on my mask, shouldered my backpack, and waited patiently for Chirring and Gyalzen to get their massive backpacks ready. They were carrying one last load up the mountain: the oxygen bottles for the upcoming Lhotse summit still had to be brought to Camp 4 on Lhotse.

Yesterday, they had asked me again how I was feeling and whether Lhotse was still part of my plan. Since I still felt great, I had clearly said yes.

At 4:45 a.m., it was our turn to join the waiting line. There is exactly one fixed rope along the entire Lhotse Face that all climbers use to ascend, so naturally it was extremely crowded that morning.
 

I found a good rhythm and, outside of the main line, was really able to enjoy the climb. The weather was perfect, and although the sun was once again shining down on us without mercy, it was nowhere near as hot as the day before. 

After four hours, we reached the Yellow Band. I was curious how the route would continue from there, because even though I had spent a lot of time over the past weeks studying the Lhotse Face, I still couldn’t really imagine what it would look like up close. 

The Yellow Band is exactly what the name suggests: a band of yellowish rock that juts out from the snow. The route led straight up through the band, which meant that climbing through it was a bit more strenuous than “just” ascending ice. 

Behind us, countless other climbers in down suits lined up, and it was easy to distinguish who was a client and who was a Sherpa. All the Sherpas still carried fully packed backpacks, while we clients mostly had compact packs containing just an oxygen bottle. 

For a while, we stood in line directly in front of another Nepali legend. Purnima Shrestha is one of the first female mountaineers I followed during my project. She is a photojournalist who gained recognition in 2024 for becoming the first person to summit Mount Everest three times in a single climbing season. She accomplished this within just 13 days and was on the mountain this season as part of a photo documentary. 

For the first two hours, our pace was very slow. Occasionally, we were able to overtake slower climbers, and eventually we saw a bigger gap in front of us, allowing us to finally move at our own rhythm. 

After about two hours, I had a small “aha” moment: when I ascend the face facing forward and then have to wait for a few minutes after every second step, my toes start getting cold rather quickly. The standing positions are very limited, and blood circulation isn't always optimal. But when I climb sideways, I apparently get perfect circulation—my feet, including the toes, stay well supplied with blood. Cold toes are almost no longer an issue, and both walking and waiting become much more pleasant. I also kept switching sides occasionally to add a bit of variety to the view. 

The rock was fissured, with many small stones scattered everywhere. Once again, it became clear that it pays off to climb a few mountains requiring crampons before attempting Everest. Crampons on rock behave differently than crampons on ice, and for me it was easy to spot the right places to put my feet. Unfortunately, that wasn’t the case for some of the people on the rope ahead of me. As a result, we moved at more of a slow-motion pace through this slightly more technical section. 

Above the Yellow Band, some people took a break, which gave us some breathing room to keep our rhythm. A little lower down that wasn’t possible anymore, because the climbers piled up again due to the loss of speed. That’s the advantage when technical challenges keep appearing on the route: you have to show some patience, but afterward, the exhausted ones need to rest, and the fit ones can overtake safely and without much trouble. 

Below the Band, it was also starting to get too warm for me in my down suit, and I had opened every possible zipper. Stopping had the added benefit that I didn’t overheat but could calmly cool down. Up to Camp 4 the route was mostly clear for us thanks to the people pausing, or else the Sherpas had their clients under such good control that they let us pass once they realized we were moving a bit faster. At Lhotse Camp 4 we took our first real break at around 11 a.m. I drank as much as I could and ate an energy bar. Meanwhile, Gyalzen and Chirring unpacked their backpacks and stashed the items meant to stay in camp into a rice sack. They first had to dig out the gear already deposited there, since the snow shovel left behind had frozen solid. They tried freeing the shovel, with only limited success. 

In the meantime, I sat just above the route, clipped into a safety line (the fixed rope that would soon lead me almost directly to Lhotse) and watched the crowd streaming toward Camp 4 above and below me, snaking along like a line of ants. Of course, all of it in slow motion and with much greater effort than 7,000 meters lower. I was right at an anchor point where climbers had to switch onto the next fixed rope. But the next rope was only two meters long before the next anchor came. So I tried to explain to everyone that for those two meters it wasn’t worth attaching the jumar, and the safety line would be enough. Unfortunately, most of them were no longer really receptive, which honestly shocked me a little. 

Of course, it’s hard with an oxygen mask, hood, and thick gloves to listen to someone, follow instructions, and carry them out. But the level of exhaustion some people showed at nearly 7,800m was something I had only expected a few hundred meters higher on summit day. I think some of them didn’t trust me, and even when I demonstrated what I meant, they didn’t really respond. For anyone who has never tried to clip a jumar onto a rope and then thread a carabiner through the corresponding hole — all while wearing thick gloves — let me tell you: it’s not easy! And certainly not fast. If only 30% had listened to me, the wait time for the others would have been much shorter. With two people, I even had to switch the carabiners for them because they had completely lost hand coordination. 

Sitting there on the route also had the advantage that I could observe the different systems companies required of their clients. Some had slings as safeties, some short, some very long. Some had to clip in with three carabiners, and the knots in the safeties varied too. Mostly, it looked very safe — provided it was applied correctly. 

While I sat there at Lhotse Camp, gloves kept tumbling down the Face. Just above my resting spot, the route bends left onto a traverse of about 100 meters, and if you drop something there, it rolls or slides down the ice wall beside the route. In just ten minutes of resting, I counted at least six single gloves making their escape.

We moved across the traverse rather slowly, since at the end of this horizontal stretch lay the Geneva Spur, the second and final technical difficulty between Camp 3 and Camp 4. Which meant once again we were mostly standing still rather than moving. From here, the route up Lhotse was clearly visible, and so I enjoyed the view during the wait, as well as the sight of Everest. This angle is only seen by people moving near the 8,000m mark, and I couldn’t get enough of both views. 

To keep from getting bored, I even sang a little to myself — sometimes silently, sometimes into my oxygen mask — and thought of my Ama Dablam guide, Stu, who had sent me a recording of “our” Ama song Father and Son before the expedition. Since I constantly had another tune (Yellow by Coldplay) stuck in my head, it took me nearly half an hour to recall Stu’s melody and another half hour to piece together the lyrics. A welcome distraction when you’re standing after 5.5 hours at nearly 7,900m on an ice wall, waiting for someone to move, don’t you think? 

Just like at the Yellow Band, at the Geneva Spur I had the feeling that I would soon need to use the toilet. Back in Camp 2 I had already been close to it, but every time I had to lift my leg too high, a certain sensation reminded me that I’d soon need my Wagbag. I tried not to think about it too much as I worked my crampons up the five-meter vertical section. I even managed to snap a great photo of Gyalzen behind me, standing in the middle of the rock wall with his huge backpack. 

Another similarity between the Geneva Spur and the Yellow Band was that I could pick up a small loose rock as a keepsake. Even though it’s a bit of extra weight, I definitely didn’t want to miss the chance to take something with me — especially since it was loose rock and I didn’t have to chip anything off Everest. That was something I would never do; the mountain is too sacred for me, and I didn’t want to anger it. 

Above the Geneva Spur, the route suddenly leveled off and curved around a rock nose. Some people stopped there to rest, and since by now I was convinced I couldn’t avoid a toilet stop, I asked how far away camp was. Up to this point I had avoided asking that question, because usually the goal is farther than you think at that stage, and the answer is only demoralizing. But the answer I got now surprised me: Chirring said we were only 20 minutes away from Camp 4. He asked if I wanted to take a break, and I replied that I’d rather go straight to camp — because if I stopped now, I’d either go in my suit or on the mountain. He only laughed at my answer, but I think he realized I was serious when I kept marching on. 

By now I was feeling increasingly uneasy, since both of those “options” were no real option at all, and the Wagbag (the mobile toilet, basically a plastic bag) was buried somewhere deep in the Sherpa’s gear. So I trudged on along the fixed rope, my thoughts circling around all the possible scenarios and consequences of a bathroom break above 7,900m. 

When I briefly looked up, I saw someone taking a break about 50 meters ahead and thought nothing more of it. Then suddenly I saw the fixed rope continuing straight ahead, but also a line of footsteps branching off to the right. I stopped and looked more closely at what was happening in front of me. My toilet problem was instantly forgotten — because only 10 meters ahead lay a visible, “fresh” Everest body. 

The person looked as if they had just lain down for a rest. Oxygen mask on their face, backpack still on, no snow covering them, still clipped into the rope, lying sideways on the slope. That sight hit me completely unexpectedly. Yes, I knew that at some point during the climb I would come close to “old” bodies. I also knew that every year people die in their attempt to fulfill their dream. But unconsciously I had hoped, since the beginning of this project, that I might be lucky enough not to be confronted with it so directly. And now here I was, less than five meters away from a lifeless down suit, completely unprepared. 

But honestly — can you really prepare for something like that in normal life? My strategy since the start of the expedition had been to avoid thinking about death or potentially fatal situations on Everest, so that I could focus completely on success. And success for me meant making it back home alive, regardless of whether I had reached the summit. During that time, especially while waiting in Base Camp, I blocked out every possible negative thought. It worked surprisingly well — until I suddenly found myself at 7,900m, standing by the fixed rope in front of this shattered dream. 

Apparently, nobody wanted to pass so close to the body — which I could fully understand — so a detour had formed about three meters off the fixed rope. That way, climbers didn’t have to unclip and reclip to pass, since the body was still attached to the safety line. As I walked by, I tried not to look too closely, but it was almost impossible. Deep down I knew the person was dead, yet I kept glancing back to check for any sign of breathing. Visually, they looked no different from us climbers making our way past. 

Even faced with this disturbing and unexpected sight, I tried once again to block out all the negative thoughts that had been waiting for their chance to break through. Understandably, it was harder than ever this time. What a strange kind of luck it was that my toilet problem came back at that moment. I shuffled on, assuming camp was still far away, determined above all to make it there “safe and sound.” 

Not even five meters past the eternal sleeper, you could reclip into the normal fixed line, and five minutes later I strolled into the legendary Camp 4 on the South Col. Since I had arrived ahead of my two Sherpas and didn’t know where our tent was, I sat down on a rock and took in the camp, and the visible part of the route still ahead of me. 

It was very windy — which shouldn’t have surprised me, but somehow did after all. Until rounding the last bend it had been nearly calm, but now gusts lashed against my backpack, and I was glad I didn’t have to stand waiting for my two heroes to arrive. 

Camp 4 is famous for many things, but most of all for one: the constant wind. The South Col is a small plateau — or more accurately a mountain saddle — about one and a half football fields in size, where the wind can really unleash itself. In a storm, you wouldn’t want to spend even a second up here. That’s one reason why the weather is studied so carefully back in Camp 2. The plan is always to spend only a few hours here, and to avoid at all costs having to sleep here overnight. Only climbers attempting Everest without supplemental oxygen spend a night here during their acclimatization. 
 

I quickly found Chirring, but he too had only run into selfish people, so we were still without a tent. Briefly, the question flared up inside me: what would we do up here in this wind without a tent? Would we have to climb straight on to the summit, or in the worst case descend back to Lhotse Camp 4 and try for the summit the next day from there? Or was our summit attempt over without a tent, forcing us to retreat? Once again, I didn’t dare voice these questions, but just turned myself so the wind hit my backpack and looked at the route leading up from camp toward the summit. 

There I saw scattered climbers descending, some sitting for breaks, others moving very, very slowly. Even from a distance, you could see most of them were exhausted and relieved to be back at camp. Since I was no longer sitting or moving, my intestines made themselves felt again, and I asked Chirring whether he had the Wagbag in his pack. He wasn’t sure, but offered to check. At that moment, Gyalzen appeared carrying a typical yellow tent bag he had managed to track down somewhere in camp. 

The plan now was to pitch a tent in the stormy wind, at 7,900m, after an 8-hour climb. Well then, I thought, the three of us would surely be faster than just the two of them, especially since they had carried much heavier packs, and I still felt fit enough to help. Step one: find a surface big enough for the tent. Step two: clear it of rocks, and if possible, of scraps of tents and packaging from previous years. 

My problem with step two: every time I bent over, my backpack shifted upward — or rather downward toward my head — and my intestinal issue felt very urgent. As soon as I stood up again, it was less acute, but I still hadn’t felt comfortable with it for quite a while. There was no chance I was getting off this mountain without… well, without doing my business. 

And on the descent, there can be situations where it makes more sense to spend a night in Camp 4 to recover before heading down. Since we had already been surrounded by many people all day, it was no surprise that the camp was bustling everywhere. Climbers arriving from the summit and from Camp 3, Sherpas hauling snow to the tents, oxygen bottles stacked up, tents flapping in the wind, and scraps of tents and packaging peeking out from under rocks all around. 

So I sat there on my rock, trying to grasp that I had arrived at the last camp before the summit. Just a few hours separated me from the final push to the top, and yet two other thoughts dominated my mind: How on earth could that climber have died just five minutes from camp? And where and how was I going to solve my toilet problem here? I knew that as long as I sat on that rock, at least the second problem wasn’t yet too urgent. And I didn’t want to pour too much energy into the first thought — it wouldn’t bring the person back to life, and sooner or later I’d hear the story behind it at Base Camp anyway. So I just sat there, letting the scene sink in, without letting myself get too overwhelmed emotionally. 

The thought “You are really in Camp 4 now and you still feel fit” repeated in my head every few seconds, because I still couldn’t quite believe how well the expedition had gone so far. By then Chirring and Gyalzen had also arrived at camp, and the three of us began searching for the 14peaks tent. Since we were the only ones from 14peaks climbing that day, we were convinced that somewhere a free tent was waiting for us. It quickly became clear, however, that many tents were already occupied by summit climbers — and the 14peaks tent wasn’t empty either. 

I don’t know exactly what Chirring and Gyalzen discussed with the Sherpas at those tents, but to me it sounded less and less friendly as time went on. It seemed the Sevensummittreks groups hadn’t stuck to the agreement to keep a tent free for 14peaks. So we went from tent to tent, trying at least to get one group to give up their tent. In that unfriendly environment, though, it was simply impossible. 

In desperation, I went to check the Indian Army tents to see if they might have a free one. From most tents you could tell right away they were occupied: crampons lying outside, or the outlines of backpacks pressed against the fabric, crammed inside along with the people. Some entrances were half open, and I could see Sherpas inside melting snow. After a while, I spotted a tent that looked empty and reached for the zipper to check — when suddenly an Army officer marched up and scolded me for daring to touch the tent. I explained as calmly as I could that our tent was occupied and we were looking for a replacement. But the man was absolutely unfriendly and unpleasant, and I wasn’t willing to be treated like that at 7,900m. So I ignored him, greeted the people inside the tent, zipped it closed again, and went back to look for Chirring and Gyalzen. All of this, of course, still with my backpack on — since my oxygen bottle was inside.
 

I quickly found Chirring, but he too had only run into selfish people, so we were still without a tent. Briefly, the question flared up inside me: what would we do up here in this wind without a tent? Would we have to climb straight on to the summit, or in the worst case descend back to Lhotse Camp 4 and try for the summit the next day from there? Or was our summit attempt over without a tent, forcing us to retreat? Once again, I didn’t dare voice these questions, but just turned myself so the wind hit my backpack and looked at the route leading up from camp toward the summit. 

There I saw scattered climbers descending, some sitting for breaks, others moving very, very slowly. Even from a distance, you could see most of them were exhausted and relieved to be back at camp. Since I was no longer sitting or moving, my intestines made themselves felt again, and I asked Chirring whether he had the Wagbag in his pack. He wasn’t sure, but offered to check. At that moment, Gyalzen appeared carrying a typical yellow tent bag he had managed to track down somewhere in camp. 

The plan now was to pitch a tent in the stormy wind, at 7,900m, after an 8-hour climb. Well then, I thought, the three of us would surely be faster than just the two of them, especially since they had carried much heavier packs, and I still felt fit enough to help. Step one: find a surface big enough for the tent. Step two: clear it of rocks, and if possible, of scraps of tents and packaging from previous years. 

My problem with step two: every time I bent over, my backpack shifted upward — or rather downward toward my head — and my intestinal issue felt very urgent. As soon as I stood up again, it was less acute, but I still hadn’t felt comfortable with it for quite a while. There was no chance I was getting off this mountain without… well, without doing my business. 

 

The only question left was how I could manage, quite literally, not to shit on a goddess (sorry for the bluntness). Once again, I asked Chirring about the Wagbag, and by sheer luck, he had packed it near the top of his backpack. The pack lay on the ground next to the spot we had chosen for the tent, and the Wagbag smiled at me from the opening. I pulled it out and, naïve as I am, told Chirring I would head behind the last tent to take care of my business. He just nodded and kept clearing rocks. 

The last tent was only a few steps away, and now it felt like every minute counted. I tore open the Wagbag, shoved the toilet paper into my pocket, and got the plastic sack ready when it suddenly occurred to me that I was still wearing my backpack and climbing harness. The backpack I had to set down right next to me. Because the hose of the oxygen mask is barely a meter long, I could no longer stand upright. I then tried to open the harness with my gloved hands, but of course, in my stressed state, it didn’t work. So I pulled off my gloves and held them between my knees so I could stash them in the backpack — which I first had to open. 

If you’re picturing this scene right now, don’t forget the 50 km/h wind constantly sweeping across the South Col. When I finally got the harness undone, I also had to unbuckle the leg loops and pack the harness away — but by then, the wind had already toppled the backpack. Bending over was still a major issue, so I tried to stand the backpack back upright by squatting. Anyone watching this little spectacle — and surely someone was, since “behind the last tent” means practically at the start of the summit route — must have been baffled by my frantic movements. 

After what felt like forever, the backpack was finally standing solid again, and I could turn my attention to the down suit, which has a special zipper at the back for toilet breaks. I opened it, and instantly it felt much colder on my backside, even though I was still wearing thermal pants. I ignored the cold and tried to position the bag so that everything would end up inside and not find its way into my precious down suit. Unfortunately, in the wind I managed neither to pull down my thermals nor to place the bag properly, so I soon gave up. There was no way I’d manage to fill the bag without a mess. So I stuffed the Wagbag into my down suit, zipped it closed again, and realized I absolutely had to get out of the wind, and fast. 

On impulse, I slung my backpack back on, went around the tent, and opened it. The odds were slim, but maybe it was empty and I could use it as a makeshift toilet. From outside, there was no sign anyone was inside, so I resolutely yanked the zipper open about 30 cm. Inside I saw a sleeping bag with a motionless person. I stared, wondering if I had just stumbled across my second Everest body. Luckily, I then noticed a faint breath movement, so I closed the zipper in relief. 

By now I really had to go, but there was simply no way to manage it outside in the wind. I steeled myself to unzip my suit again when I suddenly heard Chirring calling my name. I turned around and saw him standing by our newly pitched tent. I walked over and explained — still as naïve as ever — that behind the tent was just as windy as anywhere else on the South Col, so I was still no further with my problem. He pointed inside and said I should go in, because it was windless there. I looked inside, then back at him in disbelief. If the bag wasn’t sealed tight, we’d all literally be in deep shit. I asked if there wasn’t another option, but he curtly replied I should just get inside if I really needed to use the Wagbag. 

I knew I had no other choice, so I tried to get into the tent without bending over — for obvious reasons. Then I crouched awkwardly in the middle of the tent, forcing myself to get it done. The thought kept circling in my head: I absolutely had to hit the bag, because there wouldn’t be another tent for us, and cleaning up at these subzero temperatures would be impossible. Knowing that right outside the tent, in the howling wind, two exhausted Sherpas were fetching snow, melting it, and preparing dinner didn’t exactly make things easier. Still, it wasn’t a second too soon, and I didn’t hesitate long. 

When I was done, I also had to pee — but that isn’t allowed in the Wagbag. So I slipped into the small vestibule of the tent and relieved myself as far into the corner as possible, since it was our entrance and usually where the stove is set up. While I was carefully aiming, the zipper suddenly opened a little — Chirring wanted to check if everything was okay. In panic, I yelled that I’d need another minute, and in the process, I lost my aim. Forget peeing in the corner — the entire ice floor was now covered in urine, and I was mortified. 

First, though, I had to properly seal the Wagbag and zip up my suit again. Then I opened the tent and immediately apologized to both of them for taking so long and for peeing right in the middle of our “kitchen.” Gyalzen gave the mess just a quick glance, turned around, and came back with a bulging rice sack. Apparently, after setting up the tent, he had filled it somewhere with fresh snow and hauled it back. Now he poured a bit of snow onto the yellow ice and stomped it down with his boots. Cleanup at 7,900m, made easy.
 After that, the two of them could finally crawl into the tent as well, and we tried to distribute our backpacks and the little gear we had brought in such a way that all of us had at least a bit of space.

Saturday, 17th of May - Camp 4 to the summit

 
As soon as we had made ourselves a little comfortable, Chirring started melting snow and Gyalzen went out again to fill a second sack with snow. Apparently, this is done as a precaution because you never know if the weather will change, and this way you don’t have to fetch snow when you’re exhausted after returning from the summit to camp. After that, both of them went away for about 30 minutes to collect the last oxygen bottles for us. I don’t know exactly where these had been stored, but I was relieved when the two reappeared soon after, as the wind hadn’t gotten any weaker. By now it was 2:30 p.m., time to focus on recovery. That means trying to sleep, eating something, and drinking as much as possible whenever you have to move.

First, I inflated my air mattress, which surprisingly wasn’t too difficult considering you can’t wear the oxygen mask while doing it and you need to get much more air into the mattress than at sea level. A much bigger challenge was getting the mattress under all the gear that was already spread throughout the tent. Once that was done, I tried to get some sleep. Even though we had gotten up at 3:30 a.m. today, I wasn’t tired at all, so I just closed my eyes for an hour and tried to imagine what the next 24 hours would bring. I focused only on positive things and pictured all the different possibilities for the sunrise. Meanwhile, I kept drinking so that by 5 p.m. I had managed to finish almost 2 liters. Since I had brought a lot of snacks by my standards, I tried to eat as many as possible. So, in those three hours, I ate half a pack of Pringles and a KitKat.

Now I was slowly getting tired, but I still had my attempt at a Guinness World Record ahead of me. For that, I had brought the same 99-piece puzzle I had already taken to Manaslu. The goal was to solve the puzzle here at 7,900 m to set the record for the highest puzzle ever completed. I had applied for this record back in mid-January and still hadn’t received confirmation by the time I left base camp that I could attempt it. I wanted to do it anyway and film the whole thing so that I could submit the proof video as soon as the confirmation came through. So there I was, sitting in our tent, with the wind constantly tugging at its walls, waiting for Gyalzen, my cameraman, to be ready. I wanted to finish the puzzle as quickly as possible so he wouldn’t get cold while filming. I also took off my oxygen mask to introduce myself and the two witnesses. I forgot to put it back on before starting, and because I wanted to time the whole thing—like a real speed puzzler—and not waste any time, I left the mask off for the entire puzzle. Funny enough, it didn’t bother me at all, and I didn’t feel like I was lacking oxygen. After just under 6.5 minutes, I was almost done, except one piece had gotten lost in the depths of the tent chaos. I stopped the timer, and the three of us searched for the missing piece, which luckily turned up soon after. Now that was in the bag too, and I was ready for another tiny portion of popcorn for dinner.

While the popcorn was being prepared, I laid out all the gear for the climb. We leave as much as possible in camp so we don’t have to carry unnecessary weight. I also tried to pack everything that would stay behind neatly so that, if needed, we could quickly gather it all on the way back. I had no idea what state we’d be in when we returned to the tent 20 hours later, so I wanted to make things as easy as possible for myself and/or Chirring and Gyalzen. I assumed we’d be exhausted, so it made sense to do the logical packing now while I could still think 😊. Once that was done, I allowed myself more rest and tried to sleep.

At some point, my name suddenly came over the radio. Valery Babonov was in Camp 2 or 3 and talking with Tashi about oxygen bottles. He had originally planned to climb Everest without oxygen and had acclimatized for that with a night in Camp 4. Unfortunately, he had caught a respiratory infection, and the time for proper recovery before a good weather window was running out. We had talked in Camp 2 about the possibility that I might give up Lhotse so he could use my oxygen. Before leaving, I told him to let me know if he wanted to use the oxygen, but until that moment when I heard my name on the radio, I hadn’t heard anything from him. So I assumed he didn’t need the oxygen, which is why Chirring and Gyalzen had already placed it for our Lhotse climb. Now Val was asking over the radio where the bottles were and who would bring them down from the mountain if he used them, since I had promised them to him. This was completely different from my understanding of our conversation in Camp 2—I hadn’t promised him the oxygen, only offered it in case he told me he needed it, which hadn’t happened. Chirring and Gyalzen looked at me wide-eyed, and I explained the conversation to them. My thought in Camp 2 was this: Val is a legend in the mountaineering scene. An Everest ascent would give him a chance to secure sponsors for future projects. For me, Lhotse wouldn’t have such far-reaching consequences.

 

As a reminder: The oxygen bottles are all numbered and recorded before they leave the camp. The same happens when the empty bottles are brought back to base camp. If five bottles that, according to the notes, were carried up the mountain by us are used by someone else, that person would have to bring them down again or at least make sure it happens. Otherwise, we would be the ones who left them on the mountain. I assume that would be punished with fines—or even worse: Chirring and Gyalzen would have to go back up after the summit climb and the descent to base camp with me. We decided not to respond on the radio, and I asked Gyalzen to check with Tashi what was going on. For now, we needed the oxygen ourselves and would therefore not give it away. After that, we continued resting—I think I even managed to fall asleep for a short while. 

Suddenly, there was a lot of movement outside, and a glance out of the tent confirmed it: The girls from the Indian Army were setting off toward the summit. It’s a big group, and only when I heard all the noises they made as they departed did I realize that the wind had almost disappeared. After the storm that had greeted us on arrival, it felt strangely surreal. I had always imagined the South Col as a harsh, inhospitable wind hell, and that’s exactly how it had seemed six hours ago. But now, in the twilight and without wind, sitting in the tent, it almost felt cozy. A look at the clock confirmed that it was still too early for us to start moving—it was only 6:30 p.m. So I tried to calm down again, but my brain was already running at full speed, and it was no longer possible to keep my thoughts away from the summit and the route ahead. So I did a few crossword puzzles to avoid overthinking and to start with a positive mindset. Of course, I also used the calm before the storm to pee one more time. 

A little later, Chirring started boiling water so we could fill all the bottles and drink a few teas before setting off. I drank over a liter of tea and ate the rest of my crispbread as “breakfast.” I took two small Nalgene bottles with me for the summit because, based on experience, I don’t drink that much anyway and wanted to avoid unnecessary weight. Each bottle held 400 ml of tea or hot water. The plan was to drink one bottle on the way to the summit and then refill it with snow at the top. After eating, it was time to get dressed and finish packing, which was quite a challenge because all three of us had to do it at the same time while the stove outside kept running to make enough water for everyone. One last time, I squeezed my backside into the vestibule to avoid having to pee in the middle of the summit ridge at night. Then it was time to put on everything that was ready, put on the boots so they wouldn’t need to be touched again during the climb. After that, I packed the oxygen bottle back into my backpack, laid out my gloves, and then it was time to slip out of the tent. Once again, it felt like being born from the tent—I fell more into the darkness than crawled out. It’s not easy to get out past a running stove with an oxygen mask and all the associated gear at 7,900 m from a tiny tent. 

Outside, I strapped on my crampons and finally allowed myself a look at the route. And what I saw took my breath away a little. All I could see were headlamps—and more headlamps. At the upper end of the first section, there was a long line, apparently the Indian Army, which had set off two hours earlier. Below them, there weren’t as many, but still more than I had hoped for. I had thought most would only start at 10 or 11 p.m., and that with our early departure we would at least pass the crowds on the way up. Obviously, several other expeditions had the same idea, and now I stood there in front of our tent wanting to go back inside and wait a little longer. I asked Chirring and Gyalzen if it wouldn’t make sense to leave in three hours instead. But preparations were almost complete, and it would have meant extra effort to go back into the tent, fetch more snow, melt it, etc. Plus, we couldn’t be sure it would be better in three hours. The weather was perfect now, and that can change within minutes up here. Once Chirring and Gyalzen were ready, there was nothing left to wait for—our summit push could begin. I took one last photo of the parade of headlamps, and then we were on our way. 

We started at 8:30 p.m., and since the first section was rather flat, we ignored the fixed rope, switched to turbo mode, and overtook as many people as possible. Within a very short time, I was drenched in sweat—without wind and in the down suit, it was much warmer than I had expected. I ignored the fact that I was way too hot and ran after Chirring up the mountain. Unfortunately, this turbo lasted barely half an hour, and then the route became too steep. We had to clip into the fixed rope for safety, which also meant overtaking became much more difficult. So we lined up, and once my pulse had calmed down, I signaled to Chirring that I was ready for another sprint. He stepped out, clipped me in with him, and then we overtook about six people before clipping back into the fixed rope. We did that two more times until I told Chirring that I probably wouldn’t be able to keep up this interval training all night long. So we stayed on the fixed rope and settled into the slow rhythm. Luckily, a second fixed rope soon appeared, so we could switch over. Unfortunately, now both ropes were occupied by slow climbers, making overtaking impossible. The idea of the second fixed rope is to allow simultaneous ascent and descent. But since no one was descending, the right rope should actually be for faster climbers. This unwritten rule, however, didn’t seem to have reached the people ahead of us. 
 

On both sides of the ropes there was fresh snow, which was too dangerous for us to climb unprotected. There were a few Sherpas pushing their clients up through the fresh snow, but since we didn’t see the point in that, we refrained. At some point, it simply became too steep to go faster than necessary for any length of time. I enjoyed the sounds, the darkness, and the knowledge that I was ready for summit day as I stood there on the rope, occasionally able to take a step. At that moment, I accepted the very slow pace because I knew it would eventually end and I could then go at my own speed. Until then, I just had to endure the line and adapt. Luckily, I wasn’t cold, even though it took a while for the sweat from the initial sprint to disappear. I had heated socks running so my feet weren’t cold, and my hands were in heated gloves. These had three settings, and I kept switching between the first and second so my hands wouldn’t get cold while waiting, but the battery would last as long as possible. 

Just after 11 p.m., I saw a glowing sphere rising in the distance to my right. Since I knew we were still far, far away from sunrise, I was a little confused at first about what it could be. Apparently, there is also a kind of sunrise at this altitude, which I was now witnessing with my own eyes. It was fascinating to see how bright it gets with the moon, even though it never has the power of the sun. The whole thing was so beautiful and mesmerizing that I almost forgot I was standing in line at over 8,000 m. The first part of the route went pretty much straight up. Then the fixed rope angled slightly to the right, ran along a rock formation, and just before the Balcony passed through a mini couloir. On both sides were rocks about 1–1.5 m high, and in between a snow strip about 70 cm wide where you climb. This was a welcome change after spending hours on a wide, open snowfield. 

About two rope lengths later, we came upon a larger cluster of people, and I realized we had reached the Balcony. The Balcony is about 8,400 m high and, for us Westerners, means changing the oxygen bottle for the first time. Chirring signaled me to sit somewhere, drink something, and eat if I wanted. Gyalzen had already disappeared to stash oxygen for the descent behind a rock wall. While I tried to drink and take in—or ignore—the scene around me (I wasn’t sure which was better), Chirring quickly swapped my oxygen bottle. The goal, once again, was to overtake as many as possible to increase the chance that we could finally go at our own pace. Since I was fascinated by this human chaos, I couldn’t resist taking a video before we left. The Balcony is a small rock-snow ledge where about 60 people were now milling around, all with headlamps on their heads and surrounded by stashed oxygen bottles. The different colors of down suits flashed alternately in the beams of light. Despite so many people, I didn’t sense panic—rather, a busy efficiency from the Sherpas and already great fatigue among some Westerners. I was glad we could at least pass these now because the higher we went, the less we wanted to encounter such crowds. 

Later, when I reviewed my summit photos, I realized we had already been on the move for 5 hours and 14 minutes since leaving Camp 4. I had expected about four hours, which would almost certainly have been possible if we could have chosen our own pace. In terms of elevation, the Balcony is roughly halfway, and time-wise, I also expected that half the climb was now behind me. So I was still positive because I felt wonderful, strong, not cold, and the unique sunrise was just around the corner. Had I known at that point that I would spend another six hours standing in line, I would almost certainly have turned back. I was still convinced the line would eventually loosen up and we could climb at least part of the way without interruption. 

After the Balcony, you walk about 45 minutes along a ridge that feels almost flat compared to the climb before and after. Of course, it wasn’t really flat—you could compare the incline to a moderate hike on a Swiss trail. Unfortunately, the ridge wasn’t suitable for overtaking because on both sides was nothing but a vast, dark void. We were definitely ready to pick up the pace, but the 200 people ahead of us seemed so committed to their veeeery sloooow rhythm that they didn’t even speed up on flat terrain. That was the first time I got annoyed that so many people seemed so absorbed in themselves that it didn’t occur to them to step aside briefly to let faster climbers pass. By now, Gyalzen had caught up with us again, and so we trudged along in our usual formation behind the line: Chirring in front, then me, and right behind me Gyalzen. This provides the best possible safety because if something happens to someone, the other two are nearby and can react. Phunuru had drilled this procedure into us because at this altitude you have to act quickly. 

After the ridge, it became very steep again. On the entire route, there were really only three sections that weren’t insanely steep: the start after the South Col when we went turbo, the ridge after the Balcony, and then about 20 m after the South Summit. Luckily, on the way to Camp 4, I had learned that blood circulates perfectly in my feet when I stand or walk sideways. This knowledge now helped me keep my feet warm even while standing in line at 8,500 m. Just after 4 a.m., it was finally time for the sunrise. If you’ve never experienced one in the mountains, you should do so at least once in your life. Far in the distance, on the horizon, it begins with a delicate change in the darkness. At first, you hardly notice it, but it grows stronger by the minute, and the black turns into a deep blue and then into a dark blue, and so on. By the time the sun itself appears on the horizon, you’ve already seen countless shades of blue and just as many shades of orange and yellow. Up here, it’s even more impressive, especially this fact: The color of the sky changes at the horizon, while above you the sky is still pitch black. You can literally watch the black of the night sky being pushed upward by the light blue. Above is black, and to your right is light blue and orange. The share of light blue keeps growing, and yet you still see deep night when you tilt your head back and look up. Since we sometimes had to wait five minutes to take another step, I had plenty of time to watch this spectacle and burn it into my memory. I will probably never forget this sunrise. 

 

For the thousandth time, I sang in my head the one line that had kept my thoughts on the positive side for hours: “Look at the stars, look how they shine for you.” I imagined my loved ones at home looking at the stars and sending me positive energy. And the billions of stars you can see here without light pollution are simply indescribably beautiful. You could almost forget that you only have time to enjoy all this because slow and selfish idiots ahead are “blocking the traffic.” Whenever overtaking was possible, some wouldn’t even let you clip back into the rope properly. You practically had to shove their hands away to make space for your ascender. Other times, you looked into very tired eyes and realized their brains were already working very slowly—and we were still on the ascent. I didn’t want to take any risks, so we almost stopped trying to overtake, much to everyone’s frustration. But if you pass one slow person, there’s already another one right behind them. 

The peak of selfishness was something we experienced all the way from the end of the ridge after the Balcony to the South Summit. A single person with a Sherpa held us all up, and even calls from Westerners or Sherpas didn’t make the two step aside for five minutes—on safe ground and clipped in, of course—to let faster climbers pass. There was no one ahead of them, so it was very obvious who was responsible for the long line. But they didn’t care at all; they stoically took their 5–10 minute breaks after barely five steps. Luckily, I had occasional distractions. For example, the confirmation that my heated socks on the highest setting last almost exactly eight hours. So after sunrise, I had to keep stomping in place to avoid cold feet, which made me feel even more like I wasn’t moving forward. Or the famous shadow pyramid you only see on high mountains when the sun rises. You see a pyramid-shaped shadow behind the mountain because the sun has risen but is still lower than the summit. I had seen it for a few seconds on Aconcagua before the shadow disappeared. Here, I could admire it for several minutes and, since I was mostly standing around, even take photos of it. 

Just before 6 a.m., it finally happened—we reached the South Summit. It’s around 8,700 m high, and from there you have a magnificent view of the summit ridge. I had seen many photos of the ridge, but most were older, with one exception: When Mitch was on the summit a week ago, he had a unique view—a completely empty ridge at sunrise. Adrianna showed me the photo when we were waiting for Mitch and Gelje at base camp, and now I was seeing it with my own eyes. It looked a little different than in the photo, but it was still absolutely impressive. There were quite a few people on the ridge, though not the massive lines we had seen before. And the sun was already much higher, so the snow wasn’t bathed in that beautiful orange glow. The South Summit is also burned into my memory as a key waypoint because during the summit climb you have to descend 20 m before continuing up the ridge. That means on the way back from the summit, you have to climb those 20 m again. This climb was the insurmountable obstacle for Rob Hall back in 1996 during the Everest disaster that led to his death, and I’ve read many stories where these 20 m ended badly or almost turned into another tragedy. And now I stood there, trying to take in the view. Everyone who knows me knows I’m quite afraid of heights. When rock climbing, I often panic and my body switches into trembling mode. Claudine and I call that, with a big dose of gallows humor, “Elvis.” Well, Elvis wasn’t present yet, but my heart rate definitely shot up when I saw the terrain ahead. 

 

A thin track, maybe 20 cm wide, in the snow—with a sheer 2,000 m drop to Tibet on the right and an equally steep, rocky descent to the Western Cwm on the left, lying more than 2,300 m below us. I was actually confident I could handle this well, but all the waiting hadn’t exactly helped me stay mentally positive. Now I had come this far, and the only difficulty left was this summit ridge, which I had to cross twice. We’re talking about maybe 300 m, with the Hillary Step in the middle, which looked less intimidating from a distance than in the pictures. But we had to do it surrounded by other climbers, some already coming down or so exhausted they needed minutes-long breaks after taking just one more step. 

At least we were finally able to pass the slow duo that had held us up for hours. As soon as the mini-descent was clear, we tackled those 20 m too, and below it, to my surprise, a nearly flat spot appeared where about 20 people could fit. Once again, Chirring swapped my oxygen bottle, and I drank for the second time. I tried to finish the bottle completely so it would be ready for summit snow, but since we wanted to get back on the rope ahead of the blockers, there wasn’t quite enough time. 

The summit ridge was less crowded with climbers—at least there was no longer a continuous line ahead of us. However, the steps were now bigger and sometimes reminded me of summit day on Ama Dablam. But since not every step was extremely high, I managed to overcome them well. Sometimes you had to step onto rock and make sure your crampons didn’t slip; other times, you could simply take a big step over the rock. Unfortunately, since the short break below the South Summit, a Chinese climber with a Sherpa had pushed in front of Gyalzen, who had intended to clip back in right behind me. But the two wouldn’t let him pass anymore. Worse still, the Chinese climber kept pushing and shoving. Whenever we had to stop because someone ahead stopped or wanted to pass, he only stopped after already touching my backpack. That meant every time I halted, I felt a little shove from behind. I tried to ignore him because it’s definitely not worth getting upset over such things at this altitude. Instead, I focused on what lay ahead. The summit still seemed far away, and the ridge endless. 

After about half an hour, we reached a spot that didn’t look particularly remarkable but burned itself into my memory. To our left, the fixed rope was stretched horizontally across the snow. The path—or rather the footprints—led about 50 cm to the left of the rope, over a rock onto a small snow bridge, and then up two large vertical snow steps. Chirring went first, and his approach was as follows: He jumped from the rock onto the snow bridge and climbed the snow steps in ice-climbing style. The whole thing took maybe five seconds, but his safety leash was pulled quite tight on the fixed rope. When I saw that, I wasn’t sure about many things: I knew my safety leash was a bit shorter than Chirring’s. I was also a good head shorter than him. So I wondered if, by taking the same route as Chirring, I would even reach the snow bridge with my feet—or if I’d get stuck hanging on the fixed rope. The rope looked very taut, and I definitely didn’t want to end up dangling there. I also didn’t fully trust the snow bridge. What if it broke under me during a jump? So I had to try a different option. 

I stood there thinking about what other possibilities there were to overcome these two meters. Of course, I thought too long for the Chinese climber behind me, so I felt yet another shove and heard someone shout “Go!” I quickly tried to find a solution, which was this: Stand with my left foot on the rock, swing my right foot over the gap to hook into the snow, then push the Jumar as far forward as possible and pull myself across on the fixed rope. 

  

Unfortunately, I had overestimated my abilities a little. The split I ended up in was much wider than I had expected, and the fixed rope wasn’t nearly as tight as it had looked. So there I was, stuck in a split, with no idea what to do. I absolutely didn’t want to move my back foot because I had no clue what the situation below me looked like. The snow bridge that Chirring had used was next to me and out of reach. So I stood there for what felt like a full minute, trying to figure out how to maneuver myself out of this position without getting hurt. Behind me, the impatient Chinese climber had already caught up again and was shouting “Jump,” as if anyone could jump in a position like that. 

But panic was slowly rising in me, so I tried to push off the rock with my left, back foot and dive onto the tongue of snow in front of me. At that exact moment, my right foot slipped off the snow, and the one thing I desperately wanted to avoid happened: I ended up hanging in the fixed rope, completely unable to do anything about it. 

Chirring had already moved one or two meters ahead and didn’t notice my predicament at first. Gyalzen had been watching but couldn’t do anything either, as he was blocked by the Chinese climber and his Sherpa. I was hanging in the rope, terrified, shaking, crying, and hyperventilating. I tried pulling myself up on the jumar, but it didn’t work because the rope wasn’t tight enough. I tried getting my foot back onto the rock and even tried stepping onto the old ropes hanging nearby, but none of it worked. I just wanted to get out of this situation as fast as possible, so in my panic I tried to sit on the old ropes and somehow move on from there. That failed miserably too. 

By now, because of the hyperventilating, my sunglasses had fogged up and I couldn’t see anything anymore. Chirring had realized I was no longer behind him and tried pulling me toward him by the jumar. But with my full weight hanging on it, it wouldn’t budge. As a last resort, I tried kicking my crampons into the snow to gain just enough height—like in ice climbing—to take some weight off the jumar so that Chirring could pull me up. But the snow was too soft, or my kicks were too weak, and every time I put weight on the crampons, I slipped again. 

Apparently my struggle was taking too long for the Chinese climber, because he kept complaining nonstop, telling me to move. As if I could have. And there were people in front of him anyway—he wouldn’t have moved any faster. In his impatience, he eventually jumped onto the snow bridge, grabbed my butt, and shoved me over the snowy edge on the other side. I can still feel his hands as I write this, as if it had just happened.  

So now I lay on the other side of the hole, crying uncontrollably, shaking all over, and with only one thought in my head: “This wasn’t worth it.” And from behind me I heard, “Come on, let’s go.” I couldn’t help myself—I turned around and screamed at that Chinese asshole: “Shut the fuck up!” It was the only thing I managed to say, but it felt incredibly good in that moment. No idea whether it helped, but Chirring knelt down in front of me and asked whether I was hurt and if I was okay. 

I tried to calm down, but that doesn’t happen quickly at 8,700 meters. I lay on the ground, panting like a dog in 50-degree heat, trying to get my breathing under control. Eventually it worked, but my body was still shaking. As soon as I could breathe again, I cleaned my sunglasses and tried to focus on what was ahead. I was so close to the summit, I still felt physically fine, and Chirring didn’t seem overly worried. Still, the thought “This isn’t worth it” kept running through my head. 

Chirring double-checked that everything was okay, inspected my oxygen line, and then said we could continue. I heard nothing more from behind me—thankfully. And we no longer got bumped every few minutes when we had to wait. Apparently my outburst had worked. I took a few deep breaths and followed Chirring around the next snowy overhang.  

Not even five minutes later, we stood in front of the Hillary Step, and once again a chill ran down my spine. Right next to the fixed rope lay an “old body,” one that had been there for years. I knew from conversations with Everest veterans that you occasionally see things like that if you look off the route. But to find one right next to the trail, just five minutes after a near-death experience—that was almost too much for my brain. For a moment, I saw myself lying there, and again I thought: This just isn’t worth it. 

Since no one was climbing up the Hillary Step at that moment, Chirring grabbed the next rope and started the 10-meter ascent. I didn’t want to think about the body anymore and followed closely behind. In the Hillary Step, there are what feels like a hundred old ropes hanging everywhere, crisscrossed, because the route gets adjusted every year depending on conditions. This year, only bright orange ropes were used above Camp 4 so that you’d know which ones were the new route. Even in the middle of the Hillary Step there was another hole, but there were good steps to the left and right, so it was pretty clear where to place your feet.  

Climbing the Hillary Step took maybe five minutes, and after 28 years of worrying that I’d never get that far—let alone overcome that obstacle—it was almost disappointingly easy. During the 2015 earthquake, a large piece of rock broke off, so now you can go around the remaining rock on either side, avoiding rock climbing altogether. This makes that part of the summit ridge passable in both directions, so those long lines from earlier years are mostly gone. Still, crossing in this section isn’t without risk. 

After we climbed past the Hillary Step, more steep steps came into view, and only one thought kept looping in my mind: This isn’t worth it, this isn’t worth it, this isn’t worth it. I decided to turn around. I did not want to die on this mountain, and what had happened in the previous 15 minutes had been burned into my brain. I wanted to tell Chirring that I wanted to turn back and called out to him. He was only two meters ahead, but he didn’t hear me. So I trudged after him to get within earshot, calling his name again and again. In doing so, I almost didn’t notice the next body—sitting on the snow to the left of the route, as if just taking a quick break. It was still clipped into the orange rope, so it couldn’t have been as old as the one at the Hillary Step, which was already badly bleached. Here too, the footsteps simply led two meters further to the right, and in the meantime, a new rope had been installed so climbers didn’t have to unclip. 

But obviously, I was wrong, even though I still wasn’t fully convinced. At that point, I had the feeling that my oxygen mask was slightly frozen, because exhaling was no longer as easy as before. I had to push the air out really forcefully to get it through the mask. Since inhaling still worked perfectly, I wasn’t too worried, but I made a mental note to tell my Sherpas about it at the latest once we were on the summit. 

I followed behind Chirring around the next bend—and there it was: the summit. I stopped and let it all sink in. For so long I had dreamed of setting foot on this tiny patch of Earth, and now I was standing right in front of it, unable to believe it was real. I was seeing the summit of Mount Everest with my own eyes, and I was actually going to climb it. Somehow this message didn’t reach my brain immediately. Normally, the sight of the summit makes me cry because that’s when it becomes clear that I will reach my goal. Here, it took a few more steps before I could convince myself that what I was seeing was truly the summit of my dreams. At some point, it finally clicked—and then there was no holding back. I took the last steps very slowly, because my goggles had fogged up again and I was close to hyperventilating. As always, I realized once again that crying at this altitude is almost incompatible with breathing. But the feeling that overwhelmed me when I reached the summit had to come out somehow. After 28 years of dreaming—more than 20 of those secretly—after all the preparation and the years of waiting, after all the doubts and the endless thoughts about whether I should really attempt it, it was simply indescribable to actually stand on the summit of Mount Everest. And the best part was: there was almost no wind, just a few light gusts now and then. We had an incredible view, could look out over all of Nepal, and stood high above the cloud cover over Tibet. I could see Ama Dablam, looking so small with its 6800 meters, and I saw the valley we had trekked up. 

First, we took a group selfie together, and then we took our time to capture all the other photos. Me with my Theos, with the puzzle I had completed in Camp 4, with my summit flag, and of course with the FCB shirt. Chirring also had two flags with him that he photographed, and we took pictures of Gyalzen as well. Since I really wanted to be recognizable in the photos, I took off my mask. Funny enough, it wasn’t difficult at all to breathe without it. All in all, I didn’t wear it for about 10 minutes, and I barely noticed a difference. 

The weather was so good that I could even take off my gloves without any problem to unroll and attach the prayer flags I had brought with me. I was able to record a 360-degree video of the view—although, by chance, the stupid Chinese climber had to pose in it and almost ruined the shot.  But I also took the time to take in the entire panorama calmly. 

There were maybe 20 other people on the summit at the same time, but there was enough space for everyone. And of course, the photo of my watch showing the altitude couldn’t be missing—even though, amusingly, it didn’t show 8848 meters but 8852. I didn’t care though. 

Only then did I notice that it was already 8:20 a.m.—meaning we had spent roughly 11.5 hours in traffic jams on the way to the summit. I had originally expected around eight hours, and seeing that number was a bit shocking. But since I didn’t feel physically tired at all, I wasn’t really concerned. 

 I also didn’t forget the almost-empty bottle I had brought to fill with snow. I took one last sip and poured out the remaining water so I could refill it with summit snow. I had no idea how much of it would still be left in the end, but I would find out soon enough. 

After about 25 minutes on the summit, it was time to start the descent. After maybe ten steps, I had to turn around again, and once more I couldn’t hold back my tears. Ever since my father died 3.5 years ago, I knew that I would feel close to him again on the summit of Mount Everest. For me, he is in heaven, and whenever I stood on a summit, I felt him there and felt close to him. Knowing that I was standing on the highest summit in the world meant that I was closer to him than I would ever be again. 

So with the descent, I had to say goodbye to him a second and final time. I would have loved to walk those ten steps back and stay a little longer. But of course, that wasn’t possible. So I gave him a big hug in my mind—one I actually acted out with my arms—turned around, and continued on. 

Before leaving Basel for Everest, I had gone down to the banks of the Birs river to choose a small stone, one I carried with me throughout the entire expedition. I buried that stone in the snow on the summit, and in my imagination, that stone holds thousands of hugs from me and from all of us. So if my father ever feels lonely in heaven, he can go to Everest and pick up his hugs whenever he needs them. I know that sounds silly, naïve, or stupid to many people—but I don’t care. I felt my father’s love and support throughout this entire project, and this small gesture means so much to me that it was probably the only reason I was able to walk away from that summit at all.  My father was always proud of me and always showed me that I was a strong girl and a strong woman. No matter what crazy idea I came up with, he was the only one who didn’t dismiss it as stupid. He had such a huge part in helping me believe in myself when it came to actually undertaking this expedition. In that moment, ten meters below the summit, I missed him so much that I can hardly put it into words. 

Sunnday, 18th of May - Summit to Camp 4



I couldn’t delay the descent any longer, because the longer I stood there, the harder it would become to actually walk away. Chirring was already waving at me, and Gyalzen behind me was also signaling that I should continue. I allowed myself one last look at the summit and one final photo of the route—and then we began the long way back. 

I knew the more important half of the summit climb was still ahead. Most accidents on mountains like this happen during the descent—whether because people run out of energy, the weather changes, or they don’t have enough oxygen. I, however, knew I had enough oxygen and that I’m stronger on the way down than on the way up. I didn’t feel exhausted or tired, and I wasn’t overwhelmed by what I had just achieved. I never let myself fully celebrate until I’m safely back in Base Camp, and that was still at least 24 hours away. 

So I carefully placed one foot in front of the other to quickly find my rhythm again. Only now did I notice all the holes along the route—holes through which you could look straight into empty space or onto rocks. And the massive cornices towering along the summit ridge looked far more imposing and visible on the way back.  

Passing and overtaking other climbers was just as chaotic and annoying as during the ascent, except that it felt like far more people were coming up now compared to earlier. It took only a short time until we were back at the Hillary Step. Compared to before, it was now packed with people, and squeezing past each other was extremely exhausting. You had to make sure no one unclipped your carabiner from the rope, and when re-clipping, you had to ensure you actually had a place on the rope or were clipping into the correct one. 

People above were shouting for everyone to move, and people below were shouting the exact same thing—as if anyone could magically go faster just because someone yelled at them. Luckily, there were two ropes set up—one theoretically for ascending and one for descending—though not everyone followed that system. I successfully tried to capture the chaos with my camera and used the short waiting time wisely.  Below the Hillary Step, the rope was also doubled, and the descent rope passed just 10 centimeters from the head of the older corpse. When I noticed that, I froze completely and couldn’t take another step. Chirring must have seen me hesitate, because he turned around and asked what was wrong. I pointed at the body, and he simply said that it certainly wouldn’t jump at me. That sounded completely logical, and yet I had to summon all my courage to take the two very big steps past the head. As I said, I knew that bodies lay on various parts of the mountain, but that you’d have to pass that close to one—nobody really tells you that. Though I’m not sure it would have helped if I’d known beforehand. In any case, I was relieved to have this part of the ridge behind me and tried to refocus on the descent. 

In doing so, I completely forgot that the hole I had fallen into on the ascent was just ahead. My body reacted faster than my brain when I saw the spot. I immediately started shaking and hyperventilating again and could barely put one foot in front of the other. Gyalzen asked from behind if everything was okay and checked my oxygen tube. I tried to explain why I was reacting like this, but I think he understood even without many words. 

Luckily, the route had been adjusted in the meantime, so we no longer had to cross the hole. The people behind me had likely noticed my predicament earlier—I hung there long enough that no one could move either direction—so now there were footprints on the cornice on the Tibetan side, on the right from the ascent perspective, where the fixed rope was already set. I was able to cross the spot with three quick, easy steps. If only it had been that simple on the ascent—I could have spared myself a lot of stress. 

On the way to the South Summit, I tried to calm myself again so that my body would stop shaking, but it wasn’t easy. It definitely helped that right afterward I ran into Ben, with whom I had spent countless hours playing cards in Base Camp. He was still on his way up and looked a little tired. We exchanged a few words, he congratulated me, and I wished him lots of strength for the final stretch. I knew he would make it to the summit, and I was incredibly proud of him. 

By the way, he also had a stuffed animal with him—a little bunny his daughter had given him. After our brief exchange, I was actually quite relieved that we were taking a short break on the small platform just below the South Summit. Chirring changed my oxygen bottle one last time, and I sat there with my eyes closed, focusing only on my breathing. I knew that the light trembling would only stop once my breathing became steady again, and that was my main goal. I had now crossed the summit ridge twice, and ahead of me lay only technically easier terrain, far less exposed than the last 300 meters. And it helped to know that friends like Ben were nearby, people I could be proud of. 

When I felt ready to continue, I turned to my right toward Gyalzen to tell him I was ready to move on. He nodded at me; I stood up, turned left—and froze in place. Another nightmare scenario lay right in front of me. 

Right beside me lay—or rather hung—a young woman on her back who, at first glance, looked like another corpse. Only on second glance did I notice that she was still alive, just unable to move much anymore. And a third glance confirmed what I was seeing: this was a rescue attempt. 

Maybe you remember: the South Summit is a small rise that you have to climb on the descent from the main summit. Not even 20 meters high, but completely impassable if you can no longer walk on your own. The young woman was hanging on a rope, and a Sherpa was desperately pulling on it, trying to haul her up onto the South Summit. Behind the Sherpa stood a second Sherpa who was also pulling on the rope. The whole thing was completely uncoordinated and therefore not very successful. And the three of them were blocking the route for everyone descending. 

Chirring, who had probably witnessed many rescue attempts before, climbed past the three and started pulling on the rope as well. The young woman was about my height, wore a pink hat, and seemed to be around my age. Wanting to contribute something to the rescue, I called up to the Sherpas above, telling them to count to three and pull simultaneously. Since the woman no longer had crampons on, I grabbed her boots and tried to push her upward from below on the count of three. I noticed that she was trying to keep her legs straight, so she was still somewhat conscious. We tried three or four more times, but we didn’t get more than maybe 20 centimeters. 

From my perspective, the two Sherpas seemed to be handling the whole thing a bit half-heartedly. Maybe Chirring noticed the same, because after the next attempt he shouted something down to Gyalzen, who simply said that we now had to go. I turned around and asked what we were going to do about the woman. He replied matter-of-factly that she wasn’t our problem, but the Sherpas’. 

I wanted to try once more, so I counted loudly to three again and pushed her boots upward with all my strength. The fact that it only yielded maybe another five centimeters and left me heavily gasping for air was probably reason enough for Chirring to make it very clear that we were leaving now. It was too dangerous to continue helping here, and our goal was that all three of us would return safely to Base Camp. 

So I grabbed the young woman by the straps of her backpack and screamed at her not to give up: “If you give up, you’re gonna die.” It was the only thing left I could do, because even though I didn’t want to accept it, Chirring was right. She logically wasn’t our responsibility. But my mind refused to process that reality. 

That the terrain after the South Summit was technically easy definitely worked in my favor, because mentally I was still caught up in the rescue situation, even though I should have been focusing on the descent. Luckily, just below the South Summit, I encountered another familiar face. Kenton Cool—whom I had already mentioned back in Camp 2—was on his way to the summit with his client Richard, and he was exactly the distraction I needed from the drama that was unfolding nearby without our involvement.  We chatted for about five minutes; they had purposely left Camp 4 at 11 p.m. to avoid the crowds. It hadn’t helped them much—maybe they spent an hour less in traffic than we had, but now they would likely have to cross even more climbers on their ascent than we had. 

The conversation was exactly what I needed, because as soon as I said goodbye to him, I was able to focus on the descent again and mentally push the helpless young woman far away. Since we had to stop every now and then on the descent anyway, we could really enjoy the view and the panorama opening up beneath us. I don’t think I will ever again see anything as beautiful and majestic. All the peaks in sight were still below us, radiating sheer power and monstrosity. The best view after the South Summit, however, was of Lhotse and its couloir. From Camp 4, the Lhotse didn’t look that steep, but now a nearly vertical line of snow shot up toward the summit. Whenever I had to stop, I stared over at that icy chute and wondered if it was the right thing to climb it tomorrow. 

I was convinced I could physically overcome those roughly 600 vertical meters and stand on the summit. What I was no longer convinced about was the descent. One mistake and you’d be in free fall for many, many meters—there was absolutely no room for error. And on top of that, today’s ascent of Everest had been anything but enjoyable. We had to queue the entire time; it had nothing to do with mountaineering. Apart from the summit ridge, the route wasn’t technical at all. I knew that Lhotse, except for the last 50 meters, wouldn’t offer any real technical challenges either, which would normally argue in favor of attempting the summit. But I wasn’t sure whether some tiny unexpected issue on Lhotse might bring Elvis back—and whether I’d still be mentally stable enough to descend safely without making mistakes. I didn’t want to take that risk. 

For the past three years, I had always sworn that I’d only climb a mountain if I were 100% convinced. At the slightest doubt, I wanted to rethink the whole thing. Now, I didn’t just have small doubts—I had very big doubts about the entire second half of the Lhotse climb. I really did want to go up, and I had even paid USD 18,500 specifically for the chance to attempt it the next day. But was that money worth potentially risking three lives? The clear answer was no. 

During one of our breaks on the descent, I brought all of this up with Chirring. It would have been his first Lhotse summit, and he naturally didn’t like the doubts I was expressing. Another important point was all the work my two heroes had put into preparing the Lhotse climb. They had carried loads at least twice as often as for a "normal" Everest ascent—and now all of that would go to waste? Our plan had been that Gyalzen wouldn’t go up Lhotse at all. He would descend from the South Col straight to Camp 2. The next day, he would come back up with an empty pack and welcome us in camp with hot water. For him, it didn’t really matter whether we attempted the summit or not. 

Our small discussion was interrupted by a strange scene at an anchor point. In front of us stood a Sherpa with his client at an anchor where a rope was set up for rappelling. The Sherpa had to explain to his client how to rappel. Since he didn’t have a belay device, he first had to learn how to tie a Münter hitch, then use it to rappel about 40 meters. There were a few old ropes hanging there too, but they were so damaged that I’d only touch them in an absolute emergency. The sole viable way to Camp 4 was the rope the Westerner was now trying—apparently for the hundredth time—to tie the correct knot on. The Sherpa stood calmly next to him, unconcerned by the growing line of people above them waiting to descend. 

You’d think I’d be used to waiting by now, but the whole scene frustrated me deeply. Not to mention the Sherpas passing the time by smoking. We were still somewhere between 8,500 and 8,600 meters, and I had to change my position because cigarette smoke was bothering me. I could have done without that scenario just as much as without the knot-tying lesson at the anchor. 

This guy had very likely just summited Everest, yet he didn’t even know how to rappel. How had he even made it up here? Thoughts like that flashed through my mind, but I didn’t want to get distracted. I wanted to focus on the fact that we would soon be safely back in Camp 4. Once it was our turn, we clipped into the rope one after the other and rappelled down smoothly. At the next anchor, we were already able to pass the incompetent guy and continue our descent at our own pace. It was fascinating to see the route in daylight and to finally look to the right and left of it. On the ascent, I had plenty of time to look around, but my eyes were drawn almost exclusively to the stars. Somehow the route also looked much steeper on the descent than on the ascent, probably because we were moving so slowly and the steps in the snow and ice were spaced so comfortably. 

 At the Balcony, we changed my oxygen bottle again and took another short drink break. Camp 4 was already visible, and the path to it wasn’t far. Since most of the ropes were now empty, we could rappel down them quickly, which saved a lot of time and required far less energy than descending while holding the rope in both hands. For those who don’t know the difference: when rappelling, you run the rope through a belay device clipped to your harness. Your body weight lets the rope slide through at a controlled pace so it brakes enough to prevent slipping. If the wall is steep enough, you can lower yourself with very little effort, using your hands on the rope only to control the speed. If you’re not rappelling, you have to brake your full body weight with every step and make sure you’re holding the rope securely with both hands. Since you have no belay device in the system, if you slip, the only thing stopping you is your grip on the rope. One mistake is unforgivable. 
 

Being able to rappel almost the entire way from the Balcony was a double benefit: it required far less energy and was much safer. The closer we got to Camp 4, the more I felt my bladder pressing. As always, I never have to pee until just before reaching camp, and as soon as the safety of camp comes into sight, my bladder starts sending the first signals. At the end of the last rope I sent Chirring ahead toward camp so I could pee in peace. 

Of course, I first had to take off my climbing harness again, which with gloves on felt like an eternity. In the heat of the moment I did remember to pull down my thermal pants, but for one whole second I forgot about the flap on my down suit. Luckily I noticed my mistake quickly, and the urine beaded off the down suit without making a mess. I laughed at myself, cleaned everything up, and got dressed again. I walked the last few steps to camp with a huge grin on my face because the first, and probably hardest, stage was done. 

Chirring had waited for me outside the tent so he could switch me to another oxygen bottle. By then, I had completely lost track of whether it was a new one or a half-used one. I trusted him and Gyalzen completely—who arrived about five minutes later—so I just let him do his thing. Then I slipped into the tent, because the plan was to rest for a bit before descending further. 

As soon as I settled into my spot at the back of the tent, Chirring followed—more collapsing than crawling—and immediately fell asleep. He hadn’t taken the time to remove his shoes or gloves and looked utterly exhausted. That was the moment I definitively decided against climbing Lhotse. The value of a summit can never be compared to the value of a human life, and Chirring had a one-year-old daughter at home who deserved to grow up with her father. I didn’t want to be the reason that might not happen. 

Since Chirring was already asleep, it fell to Gyalzen to boil water so we could have something warm to drink. I refilled my bottles and used them as hot-water bottles again. I also took the opportunity to free my feet from my boots and give them some air. Gyalzen told me I could sleep for one or two hours so I’d have enough energy for the descent to Camp 3. But from experience I know that I’m weaker after breaks—I absolutely didn’t want to sleep—so I made some handwritten notes for the blog and solved crossword puzzles while my two heroes slept beside me. 

I think it was important for me in that moment to get the whole experience onto paper immediately, because honestly, since arriving in Camp 4, thousands of thoughts had been circling in my head. At least I no longer had to agonize over whether to attempt Lhotse. For me, the decision was made—we wouldn’t take that risk. 

I wrote down the reasons in Camp 4, and I don’t want to keep them from you: 

  • On the summit ridge, my whole body shook after every moment of shock, and calming down took time. I don’t know if that would be possible while hanging from a rope in a vertical ice couloir.
  • I didn’t want to pass another corpse to reach another summit. And from Adrianna’s stories, I knew another quite gruesome body awaited somewhere below the Lhotse summit.
  • Mentally I felt anything but ready for the descent from Lhotse, even though I was certain I could handle the ascent. But somehow, I just didn’t trust myself to handle the descent without mistakes.
  • A “pro” argument would have been that I could climb an 8,000-meter peak without queues. Even on Manaslu I had to wait near the top. The thought of enjoying a high summit without crowds was beautiful.
  • I also felt guilty because Chirring and Gyalzen had prepared everything for Lhotse and carried heavier loads more often because of it.
  • And of course, there was the fact that I had paid the price of a car for the climb—and wouldn’t get any of that money back.

But was it worth it? Why did I even want to climb Lhotse in the first place? The answer is simple: because the view of Everest is unique and I wanted to experience and photograph it. But was it worth risking two lives? I had fulfilled my Everest dream. I should be humble, be grateful, and listen to my heart, which clearly said we shouldn’t attempt it. The decision felt just as right in this moment as the decision had felt back in January to attempt Lhotse. 

I also thought about my gear, since I had time and didn’t want to sleep. As mentioned earlier, my socks had served me well for eight hours, and my gloves kept my hands warm. Unfortunately, the fabric structure of the gloves wasn’t ideal for the fixed ropes—they were rather slippery, which meant I had to pay extra attention on the descent. My question about the iced-up oxygen mask before the summit was still unanswered, though no longer particularly important. I could always inhale very well, and only during those ten minutes before the summit did I have trouble exhaling. 

The only thing I could have improved in terms of equipment is that I should have packed my thin gloves as well. During the descent—which we could do almost entirely at our own pace—it gradually became very hot. Lighter gloves would have been a plus, because for safety reasons you should never descend without gloves, and sweating inside gloves is also not ideal. I tried to compensate by taking my gloves off during each longer break. Once, one glove slipped out of my hand but fortunately stopped after two meters under the rope, so I could easily retrieve it.

I had also written down in Camp 4 whether the whole thing had really been worth it. Standing in a queue for 11.5 hours is 0.0% fun and has nothing to do with mountaineering. Luckily, I was only cold for a short time, but without such good gear I would have come home with frostbite just like many others. Then there was the episode with the rappelling lesson on the descent. How many people who were on the route above Camp 4 at the same time as I was had atrocious technical skills and were climbing Everest only to brag, show off, or polish their image? And that, even though the mountain doesn’t actually have many technically demanding sections. 

From the South Summit onward there are a few tricky bits, since you repeatedly have to stand on rock with crampons. That’s why I would call the summit ridge—which almost made me turn around—the most interesting part of the route. The rest is simply walking uphill on a rope. I always knew that, but somehow I thought it wouldn’t matter to me. And now I was sitting in Camp 4 asking myself whether it had all been worth it. 

I felt a sort of obligation to apologize—to Chirring and Gyalzen, to my family and friends, and to the young woman I couldn’t help more. When I had been waiting for days in Base Camp for my “go,” I had imagined a thousand times how I would feel if I actually reached my goal. Never in my life would I have thought that I’d end up sitting in Camp 4 feeling not joy but guilt. I suppose that’s what you’d call a realistic picture of Everest—there’s no other way to explain it. 

All those thoughts swirling in my head made me fidgety, so I switched things up by solving some crossword puzzles and looking at my pictures for the first time. I realized that although it took us 11.5 hours to reach the summit, it took only 3.5 hours to get back to Camp 4. Normally, on any mountain, my descent takes about half the time of the ascent. With my expected 8-hour ascent, that pace would have been easily manageable. At least that made me a little happy—it showed that I had prepared well and that, in some way, I had earned the summit.